TRN 4517 400 03 - SG Ins - Lec - EN

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
r
Fo
Authored and published using

Copyright © 2015 PTC Inc. and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC Inc. and its subsidiary companies
(collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries
and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such
documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed.
Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This
documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified or reduced to any form, including
electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written
consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
y
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the
nl
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
O
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
se
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
U
scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
al
and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
rn
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or
copyright notice, of your PTC software.
te
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
In
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)

(JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
C
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer

Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 01012015
PT
PTC Inc., 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
r
TRN-4517-M03-EN-LM-P01 07/23/2015 Initial Printing of:

Fo
Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Printed in the U.S.A
About PTC University
Welcome to PTC University!

With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
• An innovative learning methodology – PTC’s Precision Learning
Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.
• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same
y
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive
nl
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
O
• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certificatio process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting
se
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualifie
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
U
derived from thousands of deployments.
• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you
al
need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries

offering content in nine languages.
rn
• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people

have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
te
organization’s overall performance goals.

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
In
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:

C
• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
PT
post-classroom tools.
• Pro/FICIENCY – This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
r
• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that will

Fo
compliment your instructor-led course.

• Precision LMS – A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specifi goals,
current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
North America
• Education Services Registration
– Tel: (888) 782-3773
– Fax: (781) 370-5307
• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
– Tel: (800) 477-6435
– Fax: (781) 707-0328
y
• License Management and Contracts
nl
– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
– Fax: (781) 707-0331
O
Europe
se
• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
U
Asia
al
• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact

information.
rn
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
te
to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
In
searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also fin general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
Support, and PTC Partners.
C
r PT
Fo
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom

PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:
• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key
concepts.
• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
y
software application.
nl
• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.
O
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to
assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also
se
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
U
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.
al
Precision Learning After the Class

rn
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
te
have one.
In
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a
C
Recommended Learning Report based on your results.

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same
PT
instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The

Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
r
Fo
Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.
Precision Learning Recommendations
PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process
Module 02 ― Design Model Preparation
Module 03 ― Design Model Analysis
Module 04 ― Mold Models
Module 05 ― Shrinkage
Module 06 ― Workpieces
y
Module 07 ― Mold Volume Creation
nl
O
Day 2
Module 08 ― Parting Lines
Module
Module
09
10
―
―
Skirt Surfaces
Parting Surface Creationse
U
Module 11 ― Splitting Mold Volumes
al
Module 12 ― Mold Component Extraction

Module 13 ― Mold Features Creation
rn
Module 14 ― Filling and Opening the Mold

te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Table of Contents
Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process ..................1-1
Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process ..........................................1-2
Design Model Preparation ............................................................2-1
Understanding Mold Theory ......................................................2-2
Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process .............................2-4
Creating Profil Rib Features .....................................................2-6
y
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch ...................................................2-9
nl
Creating Drafts Split at Curve .................................................. 2-12
Creating Drafts Split at Surface ................................................ 2-15
O
Design Model Analysis .................................................................3-1
se
Analyzing Design Models Theory................................................3-2
Performing a Draft Check..........................................................3-3
U
Performing a Section Thickness Check ........................................3-7
Performing a Thickness Check................................................. 3-12
al
Mold Models ...............................................................................4-1

rn
Creating New Mold Models .......................................................4-2

Analyzing Model Accuracy ........................................................4-7
te
Locating the Reference Model ................................................. 4-12

In
Assembling the Reference Model ............................................. 4-17

Creating the Reference Model ................................................. 4-21
C
Redefinin the Reference Model .............................................. 4-26

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation ..................................... 4-28
PT
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout .................................................. 4-34

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout....................................... 4-38
r
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation................................... 4-42

Fo
Calculating Projected Area ...................................................... 4-46

Shrinkage ...................................................................................5-1
Understanding Shrinkage..........................................................5-2
Applying Shrinkage by Scale .....................................................5-4
Applying Shrinkage by Dimension...............................................5-8
Workpieces.................................................................................6-1
Creating Display Styles ............................................................6-2
Creating a Workpiece Automatically ............................................6-7
Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece ................................... 6-11
Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually.......................... 6-13
Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model Components ................. 6-18
Mold Volume Creation ..................................................................7-1
Surfacing Terms ......................................................................7-2
Understanding Mold Volumes ....................................................7-4
Sketching Mold Volumes...........................................................7-6
Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts ...................................... 7-10
Sketching Slider Mold Volumes ................................................ 7-15
Creating a Reference Part Cutout ............................................. 7-21
Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes ................................................. 7-26
Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry ........................... 7-30
Sketching Insert Mold Volumes ................................................ 7-35
Parting Lines ..............................................................................8-1
y
Understanding Parting Lines......................................................8-2
nl
Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using Silhouette Curves ............8-3
Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides ..................................8-8
O
Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop Selection..................... 8-11
se
Skirt Surfaces .............................................................................9-1
Understanding Parting Surfaces .................................................9-2
U
Creating a Skirt Surface............................................................9-3
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves............................9-8
al
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions.................... 9-12

rn
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions .................. 9-17

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension ..................... 9-22
te
Parting Surface Creation ............................................................ 10-1

In
Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools ........................ 10-2

Merging Surfaces .................................................................. 10-7
C
Creating a Shadow Surface ................................................... 10-11

Creating a Parting Surface Manually ....................................... 10-16
PT
Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces ........................................... 10-17

Creating Fill Surfaces ........................................................... 10-22
r
Extending Curves ................................................................ 10-26

Fo
Filling Loops....................................................................... 10-32

Creating Shut Offs ............................................................... 10-36
Splitting Mold Volumes............................................................... 11-1
Splitting the Workpiece ........................................................... 11-2
Splitting Mold Volumes ........................................................... 11-6
Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces ....................... 11-11
Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items ....................................... 11-15
Analyzing Split Classificatio ................................................. 11-19
Mold Component Extraction ....................................................... 12-1
Extracting Mold Components from Volumes ................................ 12-2
Applying Start Models to Mold Components ................................ 12-6
Mold Features Creation .............................................................. 13-1
Creating Waterline Circuits ...................................................... 13-2
Analyzing Waterline End Conditions .......................................... 13-6
Performing a Waterlines Check ................................................ 13-9
Understanding Mold Analysis Settings ..................................... 13-14
Creating Sprues and Runners ................................................ 13-16
Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes ...................................... 13-22
Creating UDFs.................................................................... 13-28
Placing UDFs ..................................................................... 13-33
Filling and Opening the Mold ...................................................... 14-1
Creating a Molding ................................................................ 14-2
y
Opening the Mold .................................................................. 14-4
nl
Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step......................................... 14-9
O
Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step ............................. 14-12
Viewing Mold Information ...................................................... 14-15
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Student Preface — Using the Header
y
nl
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
O
Course Handbook Layout:
• Modules
– Topics se
U
♦ Concept
al
♦ Theory
♦ Procedure
rn
♦ Exercise (if applicable)

te
Procedure / Exercise Header:

In
C
r PT
Fo
Course Handbook Layout
The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate

information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specifi portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figure and bullets.
• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figure .
• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specifi topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
y
• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
nl
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an
O
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML file .
se
The firs module for certain courses is known as a “process
module.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
U
al
Procedure / Exercise Header

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as
rn
concise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name
of the lab, the working directory, and the fil you are to open.
te
The following items are indicated in the figur above, where applicable:
In
1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.

2. Scenario — This briefl describes what will be done in the lab. The
Scenario is only found in Exercises.
C
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should

PT
close any open file and erase them from memory:

• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.
r
• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.

Fo
4. Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab file are
stored in topic folders within specifi functional area folders. The path to
the lab file is:
• PTCU\CreoParametric3\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open — This is the fil to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the fil in the browser and
select Open.
6. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
• Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
y
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs
nl
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you
configur Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab
O
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
se
• Extract the class file zip fil to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
U
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3\.
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
al
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.

rn
– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
te
the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3\.

• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configure shortcut.
In
– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric3 folder.

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
C
r PT
Fo
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT
Step 1: Configur Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

the lab exercises properly.
y
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
nl
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
O
1. Extract the zipped class file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
se
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3.
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
U
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
al
• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be

rn
PTCU\CreoParametric3.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configure shortcut.
te
• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric3 folder.

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
In
Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflict .
C
PT
1. If you currently have file open, click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.
r
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.
Fo
• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.
1. Notice the
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_
Folder as indicated in the header
above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder
Browser tab from the
navigator.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
3. Click Working Directory

to view the current working
te
directory folder in the browser.

In
• Double-click
SampleFunctionalArea.
C
r PT
Fo
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working
Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display
the contents of the new working directory in the browser.
y
nl
O
se
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the
browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and
U
select Set Working Directory from the browser.
al
Step 4: Open the fil for this procedure.

rn
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specifie in the header

above.
te
• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

In
2. You are now ready to begin the firs task in the lab:
• Read the firs task.
C
• Perform the firs step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
PT
datum display for the procedure or exercise.

• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
r
Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.

Fo
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum
Display types to enable and disable. For example, “Enable only the
following Datum Display types: .”
2. To set the datum display, firs click the Datum Display drop-down
menu from the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Next, enable and disable the
check boxes as necessary. For
example you could disable the
Select All check box, and then
enable only the desired datum
types.
4. The model should now appear

as shown.
y
nl
O
se
U
This completes the procedure.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Module 1
y
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic
nl
Mold Process
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn about the basic mold process that is typically used
U
to take a part from its design stage to the creation of its mold. This simplifie
process is used at most companies; however, your specifi company process
al
may differ. The process is explained in further detail throughout the course
modules.
rn
Objectives
te
After completing this module, you will be able to:

In
• Run a draft check on a design model.

• Create a new mold model and assemble the reference model and
C
workpiece.
• Create a slider mold volume for undercut geometry.
PT
• Create the mold parting surface using a skirt surface.

• Create the mold components by splitting the mold volumes and generating
r
the cavity components.

Fo
• Create mold features by creating a runner in the mold model.

• Fill and open the mold by creating a molding and performing a mold
opening analysis.
© 2015 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process
The basic mold process can be summarized in seven high-level
steps:
1. Preparing and Analyzing
Design Models
• Drafts and draft/thickness
checks.
2. Creating the Mold Model Figure 1 – Analyzing a
• Reference model, shrinkage, Design Model
and workpiece.
y
3. Creating Mold Volumes
nl
• Sliders and other sketched
volumes.
O
4. Creating Parting Surfaces
5. Creating Mold Components
• Split Mold Volumes and
create cavity insert parts. se
Figure 2 – Creating the Mold
U
Model and Parting Surface
6. Creating Mold Features
• Waterlines, runners, and
al
ejector pin holes.

rn
7. Filling and Opening the Mold

• Create a molding and open
te
the mold.
In
Figure 3 – Filling and Opening

C
the Mold
PT
Preparing and Analyzing Design Models

When you create a mold for a design model, you should firs inspect the
r
model and analyze it to verify that it is indeed ready to be molded. Typically,

Fo
the reference model geometry that you use for a mold model is derived from
the design model. You can analyze the design model and reference model
for adequate draft features and consistent thickness, adding draft features if
necessary. It is critical that the fina reference model has sufficien draft so
that it can be cleanly ejected from the mold.
Creating the Mold Model
Start the mold design by creating a mold manufacturing model. Creo
Parametric automatically creates the mold assembly when you create the
mold manufacturing model. The mold manufacturing model is also referred to
as the Mold Model. Next, you assemble the reference model, which can be
either the design model that is to be molded or a new model derived from
the design model. You can account for the contraction of the molding part
during cooling in the molding process by applying a shrinkage factor to the
reference model. You also create or assemble the workpiece that represents
Module 1 | Page 2 © 2015 PTC

the full volume of all the mold components that are needed to complete the
mold model.
Creating Mold Volumes

You can create mold volumes manually using sketch-based features. A
mold volume is a three-dimensional, enclosed surface quilt with no mass
in the workpiece of a mold model. You can also manually create a special
type of mold volume called a slider. Creo Parametric can also create one
automatically by calculating undercut areas in the mold model.
Creating Parting Surfaces

You can create parting surfaces for the mold model using the skirt surface
y
technique. The skirt surface technique requires parting lines that you create
nl
by using silhouette curves. You can use the parting surfaces to split the
workpiece into separate mold volumes later in the mold design process. You
O
can also create parting surfaces manually.
se
Creating Mold Components
You can split the workpiece volume into one or more mold volumes based
U
on the parting surfaces. The main mold volumes are classifie into core
and cavity. Once the desired mold volumes are created and split, you can
al
create the mold components, including sliders, from the mold volumes. The
mold components are fully functional parts that you can open and modify in
rn
the Part mode of Creo Parametric. You can also machine the components
using Creo NC.
te
Creating Mold Features

In
You can create regular and user-define assembly features to facilitate the
molding process. Regular features include mold-specifi features such as
C
waterlines, runners, and ejector-pin clearance holes. You can also create
user-define features from regular cuts and slots that are placed on mold
PT
models to create sprues.
Filling and Opening the Mold

r
Fo
You can create the molding component that represents the fille mold cavity.
Creo Parametric creates the molding component automatically by determining
the volume remaining in the workpiece after extracting the mold components.
You can then defin the steps for the mold-opening process for every
component in the mold model except the reference model and workpiece.
During the mold opening analysis, you can determine whether there is
interference with any static components for each of the steps that you defin .

PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process
Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.
• Create a mold model.
• Create mold volumes.
• Create a parting surface.
• Create mold components.
• Create mold features.
y
• Fill and open the resulting mold.
nl
You are a design engineer in a camera company. You have been provided
O
with the front housing of a new camera design and are tasked with creating
the manufacturing mold for it. You know from previously received models
that you must firs prepare and analyze the design model to verify that it
can be manufactured.
se
U
Once you have verifie that the design model can be manufactured using
a mold, you can create the mold model and mold volumes. You can then
create the mold-parting surface and mold components. Finally, you can fil
al
and open the resulting mold.

rn

te
Process\Mold CAMERA.PRT
In
Step 1: Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.

C
1. Enable only the following Datum

PT
Display types: .
2. In the ribbon, select the
Applications tab.
r
Fo
3. Click Mold/Cast from the

Engineering group to toggle from
the standard application to the
Mold application.
4. Click Draft from the Analysis
group.

5. To perform a draft check, do the
following:
• In the model tree, select
CAMERA.PRT.
• In the Draft Analysis dialog
box, clear the Use the pull
direction check box.
• Click in the Direction collector
and select datum plane TOP.
• Type 0.5 as the value for the
Draft angle and press ENTER.
y
6. In the Color Scale dialog box,
nl
click Expand .
O
7. Edit the number of colors to 3.
The positive draft areas
appear in blue and the
negative draft areas in red. se
U
The vertical walls appear
in gray. This demonstrates
al
that the part is fully drafted

and is ready to be used in
rn
creating a mold model.

te
In
C
8. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.

PT
9. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

r
Fo

Step 2: Create the camera mold model.
1. Click New from the Quick

Access toolbar.
2. In the New dialog box, do the
following:
• Select Manufacturing as the
Type.
• Select Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
y
• Type camera_mold as the
nl
Name.
• Clear the Use default
O
template check box and
click OK.
se
• Select the mmns_mfg_mold
template.
U
• Click OK.
3. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
al
• Click Add.
rn
• Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name fiel .

• Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.
te
4. Select Locate Reference Model

In
from the Reference Model

types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
C
group to assemble the reference

PT
model.
5. In the Open dialog box, select
CAMERA.PRT and click Open.
r
6. In the Create Reference Model

Fo
dialog box, select Same model

as the Reference model type
and click OK.
7. Specify the mold cavity layout by
doing the following:
• Click Reference Model Origin
from the Layout dialog
box and select the MAIN
coordinate system in the
CAMERA.PRT sub-window.
• Click Preview and notice
how the reference model is
assembled and oriented.

8. In the Layout dialog box, select
Rectangular as the Layout.
• Select X-Symmetric as the
Orientation.
• Type 120 as the X Increment
value and 150 as the Y
Increment value.
• Click Preview.
• Notice that a pattern of
reference models, symmetric
about the X-axis, are
y
assembled to create a
nl
multi-cavity mold.
O
Y-Symmetric as the Orientation
and click Preview.
10. Notice that a pattern of reference
models, symmetric about the se
U
Y-axis, are assembled to create
a multi-cavity mold.
al
11. Select Single as the Layout to

create a single-cavity mold and
rn
click OK.
12. In the Warning message window,
te
click OK to accept the change in

the absolute accuracy value.
In
13. Apply shrinkage to the reference

C
model by doing the following:

PT
• Select Shrink by scale

from the Shrinkage types
drop-down menu in the
Modifier group.
r
Fo
• In the model tree, click the

node for CAMERA.PRT to
expand it and select the
PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate
system.
• Type 0.005 as the Shrink Ratio
in the Shrinkage By Scale
dialog box and press ENTER.
• Click Apply Changes .

14. Select Automatic Workpiece
from the Workpiece
group to create an automatic
workpiece.
15. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, do the following:
• Select the MOLD_DEF_CSYS
coordinate system from the
graphics window as the Mold
y
Origin.
nl
• Type 20 for the negative, and
type 20 for the positive X
O
direction values.
se
type 30 for the positive Y
direction values.
U
type 20 for the positive Z
direction values.
al
• Click OK.
rn
16. Disable Plane Display and

te
Csys Display .
17. Select CAMERA_MOLD_WRK.
In
PRT.
18. In the ribbon, select the View
C
tab.
PT
19. Click the Model Display group

drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
r
Wireframe.
Fo
20. Select the Mold tab.

Step 3: Create slider mold volumes.
1. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down

menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to create the slider
volume.
2. To rename the mold volume feature, do the following:
• Click Properties from the Controls group.
• Type Slider as the Name of the mold volume in the Properties
dialog box and press ENTER.
y
3. Click Slider from the Volume Tools group.
nl
4. In the Slider Volume dialog box,
do the following:
O
• Click Calculate Undercut
.
se
Boundaries
• Press CTRL and select Quilt
1 and Quilt 2 from the Exclude
U
column.
• Click Include Boundary
al
Surfaces to add the

selected quilts to the Include
rn
column for slider calculation.

• Click Select Projection Plane
te
and select the right surface

In
of the workpiece.
5. Click Apply Changes from

C
the Slider Volume dialog box.

PT
6. Click OK from the Controls

group.
r
You can also manually

Fo
sketch the shape of the

slider volume to represent a
standard shape that can be
manufactured.

Step 4: Create a parting surface.
1. Click Silhouette Curve from

the Design Features group to
automatically create parting line
curves.
2. In the Silhouette Curve dialog
box, click Preview to observe the
silhouette curves automatically
created at all edges of the mold
model.
y
3. Notice that some adjustments
nl
need to be made to the automatic
parting line curves.
O
box, double-click Slides.
• Select the slider volume from
the graphics window. se
U
• Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
al
rn
5. In the Silhouette Curve

te
dialog box, double-click Loop

Selection.
In
• Select the Chains tab.

• Select chain 4–1 and click
C
Lower to move the curve from

the upper edge to the lower
PT
edge of the hole.

• Click OK from the Loop
Selection dialog box.
r
Fo
6. Click OK from the Silhouette

Curve dialog box to complete the
parting line.

7. Click Parting Surface from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
8. Click Skirt Surface from the
Surfacing group to create an
automatic parting surface.
9. Select the workpiece.
10. Select the silhouette curve.
11. Click Done from the menu
manager.
y
nl
12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
O
double-click Extension.
13. In the Extension Control dialog
box, select the Extension
Directions tab.
se
U
• Click Add.
• Press CTRL and select the
al
two vertices.
14. Click OK from the Select dialog
rn
box.
te

manager.
In
16. Query-select the left surface of

the workpiece as the normal
C
plane.
PT
17. Click Okay from the menu

manager.
18. Click OK to close the Extension
r
Control dialog box.

Fo
19. Click OK from the Skirt Surface

dialog box.
group to complete the parting
surface.

Step 5: Create the mold components.
1. Select Volume Split from the

Mold Volume types drop-down
menu in the Parting Surface &
Mold Volume group to split the
workpiece into mold volumes.
2. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
3. Select the slider and click OK
y
from the Select dialog box.
nl
4. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
O
5. In the Properties dialog box, type main_vol as the Name of the firs
se
volume and press ENTER.
6. In the Properties dialog box, type slider_vol as the Name of the
U
second volume and press ENTER.
al
7. Click Volume Split to split

the main volume into core and
rn
cavity inserts.
8. Click Two Volumes > Mold
te
Volume > Done .

9. In the Search Tool dialog box, do
In
the following:
• Select Quilt: F11(MAIN_VOL)
C
from the list of items found.

PT
• Click Add Item to add

the selected quilt to the list of
items selected.
r
• Click Close.
Fo
10. Select the parting surface (you

may have to use query select)
and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
box.
12. In the Properties dialog box, type core as the Name of the firs volume
(the lower half) and press ENTER.
13. In the Properties dialog box, type cavity as the Name of the second
volume (the upper half) and press ENTER.

14. Select Cavity insert
from the Mold Component
Components group.
15. In the Create Mold Component
dialog box, press CTRL and
select CAVITY, CORE, and
SLIDER.
• Click OK.
16. Notice that the mold components
appear as individual solid parts
y
in the model tree.
nl
17. In the model tree, right-click
O
CORE.PRT and select Open .
se
18. Click Close . U
al
rn
te
19. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

In
20. Click Mold Display from the Visibility group.

C
22. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, press CTRL and select
CAMERA, CAMERA_MOLD_WRK, and CORE from the Visible
PT
Components list and click Blank.

• Click Parting surface as the Filter.
r
• Select PART_SURF_1 and click Blank.

Fo
• Click Volume as the Filter.

• Select SLIDER_VOL and click Blank.
• Click OK.
23. In the model tree, right-click SILH_CURVE_1 and select Hide .

Step 6: Create a runner mold feature.
1. Click Runner from the

Production Features group.
2. Click Half Round from the menu
manager.
3. Type 3 as the runner diameter
and press ENTER.
4. Query-select the bottom surface
as the Sketching Plane and click
y
Okay > Default from the menu
manager.
nl
O
5. Click Sketch View from the
In Graphics toolbar.
se
6. Select datum plane
MOLD_RIGHT and the top
and bottom edges as references,
U
and click Close from the
References dialog box.
al
7. Click Line Chain and sketch

rn
two lines of equal length.

te
8. Click One-by-One and edit

the length to 29.
In
9. Click OK .
C
r PT
Fo
10. Press CTRL+D and select

CAVITY.PRT as the intersected
component.
11. Click OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
12. Click OK from the Runner dialog
box.
CORE.PRT and select Unblank.

Step 7: Fill and open the mold.
1. Click Create Molding from

the Components group to create
the molding.
2. Type camera_molding as the
Part name and press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER to accept the
default Mold Part Common
Name.
y
nl
O
4. Click Mold Opening from
the Analysis group to perform a
se
mold-opening analysis.
5. Click Define Step > Define
U
Move from the menu manager.
6. Select SLIDER.PRT.
al
7. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

rn
te
In
8. Select the edge to defin the

direction of the move.
9. Type -100 as the translation
C
value and press ENTER.

PT

manager.
r
Fo

12. Select CAVITY.PRT.

15. Type 100 as the translation value
and press ENTER.
manager.
y
nl
18. Select CORE.PRT.
O
se
U
al
rn

te
21. Type -100 as the translation

value and press ENTER.
In
C
r PT

Fo
manager.
23. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

24. Click in the background to de-select all items.
25. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.
26. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save
the model.
27. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All
, and click OK to erase the model from memory.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2
y
Design Model Preparation
nl
O
Module Overview
se
It is not uncommon for designers to hand off design models without drafts or
ribs because they do not know enough about mold design in order to make
decisions about parting surfaces and pull direction, and they may not be
U
comfortable with specifying draft angles or creating ribs. The reference model
geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model
al
geometry. Consequently, the mold designer may have to prepare the design
model so that a mold can be created from it.
rn
In this module, you learn the basics of mold design and how to prepare a
te
design model for the mold process.

In
Objectives
C
• Defin the main components of a mold.

PT
• Specify the names of the various paths used to flo material into the mold.
• Recall the items typically required of a design model to create a robust
mold and part.
r
• Create a robust mold model by creating profil rib features.

Fo
• Apply your knowledge of what makes a robust mold by definin draft and
splitting it using various techniques.

Understanding Mold Theory
The mold designer creates the mold and its components using
Creo Parametric's Mold mode.
• A mold consists of a core and

cavity.
• Sprues and runners channel
material into the void.
• Ejector pins eject the solidifie
part.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Moldbase Layout
Created in EMX
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 3 – Sprue and Runner

Figure 2 – Mold Core and Cavity Design
r
Understanding Manufacturing Mold Theory

Fo
From a manufacturing point of view, in its simplest form, a mold consists of

a core and cavity which are split at a parting line. The core is the convex
feature side of the mold that enters an opposing cavity when the mold is
closed. The cavity is the concave feature side of the mold into which an
opposing core enters when the mold is closed. An example of a mold core
and cavity is shown in Figure 2. The void between the closed core and cavity
is fille with a material such as plastic. This material-fille void becomes
the resulting part when it solidifie .
For the material to fin its way into the void, there must be various chambers
and paths created in the mold. These chambers are define as follows:
• Sprues – The route the plastic material takes from the point where it enters
the mold until it reaches the runners. When solidified it remains attached
to the part via one or more runners and is typically removed in finishin .

• Runners and gates – Channels machined into the mold that direct the
plastic material from the sprue into the mold cavity.
In Figure 3, you can see the sprue, runners, and gates attached to the four
molded pucks.
Once the material solidifies the part can be removed from the mold. To aid in
ejecting the part, mold components called ejector pins are often designed into
the mold. The sizes and arrangement of the pins are selected to minimize the
impact on the part design.
Understanding CAD Mold Theory

From a CAD point of view, a designer typically hands off a completed or
y
nearly completed Creo Parametric design model to a mold designer. The
mold designer then takes the design model and uses it to create a Reference
nl
model within Creo Parametric's Mold mode. The mold designer uses the
Reference model to create the resulting mold core and cavity components
O
which create the void of the Reference model. The mold core and cavity
components split at a location called the parting surface, which the mold
se
designer must determine.
Once the mold designer creates the mold components in Creo Parametric's
U
Mold mode, he or she can use the Expert Moldbase Extension to create
the entire moldbase layout. The Expert Moldbase Extension, or EMX, uses
al
a 2-D process-driven GUI to guide the mold designer toward the optimal
design. It uses a catalog of standard components (DME, HASCO, FUTABA,
rn
PROGRESSIVE, STARK, and so on), or customized components. Figure 1

shows a completed moldbase that was developed with the Expert Moldbase
te
Extension.
In
Mold Design using Creo Parametric focuses only on the creation of the mold
components and does not cover the Expert Moldbase Extension.
C
r PT
Fo

Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process
You may not be able to create a mold from a perfectly valid
design model.
• Design model requirements for
molding typically include:
– Draft on “vertical” surfaces.
– Uniform thickness.
– Ribs.
– Ejector pin “pads.”
y
• Preparation guidelines:
nl
– Draft applied to “vertical” faces.
– Ribs should be about half the
O
model thickness and drafted
where needed.
se
Figure 1 – Original Design Model
– Create ejector pin “pads” where
needed.
U
– Reorder or insert draft features
before rounds if possible.
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Design Model

Prepared for Molding
PT
Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process

Even though the design model you receive may be a valid design model, you
r
may not be able to use the model to create a robust mold. The following items
Fo
are typically required of the design model to create a robust mold and part:
• Draft — Facilitates the removal of the part from the mold.
• Uniform thickness — Areas of a part that are thicker than others can result
in sink zones or warping when cooling occurs.
• Ribs — Add strength and rigidity to the molded part.
• Ejector pin “pads” — Sufficien material is needed for the full diameter of
an ejector pin at the location where it pushes against the resulting part to
eject it from the mold.
These items may not be present in the design model when you receive it
because the design engineer does not know where the parting surface or
ejector pins will be located in the mold. Therefore, you must prepare the
design model for the mold process by adding the necessary features needed
to make a mold from the model.

Guidelines for Proper Design Model Preparation
The following guidelines indicate how to properly prepare a design model
for molding.
• Try to create models that are of uniform thickness to prevent sink zones or
warping in the resulting molded part.
• Create ribs that are approximately half the model's wall thickness to prevent
sink. Apply draft to the rib walls if they are “vertical” faces. Vertical faces
are those that are vertical with respect to how the mold opens. In Figure 2,
two ribs have been created and draft has been applied.
• Be aware of the need to accommodate ejector pins in your design model for
proper ejection from the mold. Create ejector pin “pads” at these locations
y
in the model where the ejector pins push against the model to eject it. In
Figure 2, four ejector pin pads have been created.
nl
• Apply draft in the proper direction at least 0.5 degrees on all “vertical”
O
faces. Draft has been applied to all faces that are vertical with respect to
how the mold opens.
se
• When creating Draft features in Creo Parametric, either reorder them to be
created before any related rounds or insert them before the rounds. This
practice results in a more robust Creo Parametric model. In Figure 2, the
U
draft has been inserted before the adjacent rounds.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Profile Rib Features
A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except
that it requires an open section sketch.
• Profil rib features require an open

sketch.
• You can edit the side that thickens.
• You can fli to which side of the
sketch you want to create the rib.
• Rib geometry adapts to the
y
adjacent, solid geometry.
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing Open Sketches
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Editing the Side Figure 3 – Flipping Which Side

PT
that Thickens the Rib is Created
Creating Profile Rib Features

r
Fo
Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profil rib feature is similar to an
extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib
also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.
After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametric
automatically creates the profil rib feature by merging it with your model.
The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness
can be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile
Rib enables you to create rib features in less time than it would take for
you to create and sketch a protrusion.

PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features
Rib\Profil RIB.PRT
Task 1: Create profil rib features on a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Profile Rib from the
Rib types drop-down menu in the
Engineering group.
y
3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
nl
4. Drag the handle and edit the
O
width to 75.
5. Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
se
U
Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to
match the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.
al
rn
6. Click Profile Rib .

7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .
te
8. Orient to the RIGHT view

orientation.
In
9. Drag the handle and edit the

width to 25. The rib is centered
C
about the sketch.

PT
10. Click Change Thickness

Option from the dashboard.
r
The rib moves to the left of the

Fo
sketch.

11. Click Change Thickness
Option again. The rib moves
to the right of the sketch.
12. Click Complete Feature .
13. Reorient the model.
y
14. Click Profile Rib .
nl
15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3 . The rib
is above the sketch.
O
se
U
16. Click the arrow in the graphics
al
window. The rib is now on the

rn
bottom of the sketch.

te
In
C
PT

r
Fo

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
You can use a sketch to define custom split lines.
• Sketch becomes linked.

• Sketch can be unlinked.
• A new sketch can be define .
• Sketch need not lie on draft surface.
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Viewing Sketch Figure 2 – Draft Split at Sketch
al
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

rn
You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to
create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split
object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You
te
can also defin a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface,
Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to
In
the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for
the draft in Figure 2.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
Draft\Split-Sketch DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a sketch.
1. Disable all Datum display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft
types drop-down menu.
y
• Select the large, front surface
containing the sketch.
nl
3. Right-click and select Draft
O
Hinges.
• Select the top surface of the
se
left rectangular “step.”
4. Drag the angle so the upper draft
U
portion goes into the model.
5. In the dashboard, select the
al
Split tab.
rn
• Select Split by split object as

the Split option.
te
• Select sketch SPLIT_

SKETCH.
In
• Select Draft second side

only as the Side option.
C
6. Drag the angle so the draft goes

into the model.
PT
7. Click Preview Feature .

r
8. Click Resume Feature .

Fo

Split tab.
• Select Draft first side only as
the Side option.

Split tab.
• Select Draft sides
independently as the Side
option.
• Edit both draft angles to 7 so
the draft goes into the model.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Drafts Split at Curve
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve.
• Material at the curve remains constant.
y
nl
Figure 2 – Draft Split at
Figure 1 – The Datum Curve Datum Curve
O
Creating Drafts Split at Curve
se
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. This causes the
material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was
U
used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create
the resulting geometry in Figure 2.
al
If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate
rn
pull direction reference.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve
Draft\Split-Curve DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a curve.

types drop-down list.
y
• Select the front surface.
nl
Hinges.
O
• Select the curve.
4. Right-click and select Pull
Direction.
• Select datum plane TOP from se
U
the model tree.
al
rn
te
In
5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

C
6. In the dashboard, click Reverse

PT
Angle .
r
Fo

Split tab.
• Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
• Select Draft sides
dependently as the Side
option.
10. Click Reverse Angle .

12. Notice that this draft has removed
material from the top and bottom
of the model.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Drafts Split at Surface
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing
material at the surface to be added.
• Additional draft hinges can be

created.
– You must firs split the draft
surfaces.
– Material remains the same size
at both draft hinge locations.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Draft Split at Surface
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Splitting the Draft Figure 3 – Selecting Multiple

at Surface Draft Hinges
PT
Creating Drafts Split at Surface

r
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at
Fo
the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you
to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must firs split
the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge
locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once
this split object was defined a second draft hinge was able to be added,
as shown in Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface
Draft\Split-Surface DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a surface.

types drop-down list.
y
• Select the front surface.
nl
O
Hinges.
• Select an edge on the front of
the top surface. se
U
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
al
query, and select the upper

Tangent chain.
rn
4. Right-click and select Pull

te
Direction.
• Select datum plane TOP from
In
the model tree.

5. Edit the draft angle to 10.
C
r PT

Fo
Split tab.
• Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
• Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.
8. Click Reverse Angle for the
lower draft angle.

References tab.
Hinges.
• Press CTRL and select an
edge on the front of the bottom
surface.
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the bottom
Tangent Chain.
y
• The Draft hinges collector
nl
should contain two Tangent
Chains.
O
QUILT and select Hide . se
U
13. Note that this draft has added
material to the center of the
al
model.
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3
y
Design Model Analysis
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Creo Parametric enables you to analyze the design model for key elements
such as proper draft and thickness before creating the mold model. These
tools help you ensure that the design model is acceptable to begin mold
U
creation.
al
In this module, you perform draft and thickness checks on design models.
rn
Objectives
te
• Understand the different types of analyses you can perform on a design

In
model.
• Perform a draft check on a design model.
C
• Perform a section thickness check on a design model.

• Perform a thickness check on a design model.
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Design Models Theory
Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is
acceptable for mold creation.
• Analysis tools include:

– Draft check
– Section Thickness check
– Thickness check
• Analysis tools can be used on
components other than the design
y
model.
nl
• Analysis tools can be used at
times other than before the mold
O
is created. Figure 1 – Draft Check
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Section Thickness Check

In
Analyzing Design Models Theory

C
You can perform analyses on design models before creating the mold model.
PT
Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is acceptable for
mold creation. You can perform the following types of analyses on design
models:
r
• Draft check
Fo
• Thickness check
• Section Thickness check
You usually use these analysis tools before the mold is created, but you can
also use them at almost any point during the mold process, including:
• Parting line creation – If the parting line location is modifie slightly you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
• Parting surface creation – Again, if the parting surface is modifie you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
• Mold component creation – You can perform a thickness check on
components other than the design model. You can perform a thickness
check on the core or cavity component to verify that it has sufficien
thickness to handle the stress during the molding part creation.

Performing a Draft Check
You can perform a draft analysis to ultimately determine whether
a model is suitable for a mold operation.
• You do not need to be in Mold
mode to perform the analysis.
• Draft Check
– Specify references:
♦ Surface
♦ Direction
Figure 1 – Incorrectly Drafted Pegs
y
– Specify options:
nl
♦ Draft angle
♦ Sample
O
♦ Quality
• Plots:
– 3-Color
– Rainbow se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Peg Geometry Updated

for Correct Draft Figure 3 – Rainbow Plot
C
Performing a Draft Check

PT
You can use draft checking to determine whether the design model has
the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles to facilitate the
mold-opening process as well as the removal of the molding component. To
r
Fo
perform the draft check, click Draft from the Analysis group if in Mold
mode, or click Draft from the Inspect Geometry group in the Analysis tab
if in Part mode.
You must specify the following references to perform a draft check:
• Surface – Specifie the surfaces for which the draft analysis is to be run.
You can select surfaces or quilts individually, or select the part node in the
model tree to select all solid geometry.
• Direction – Specifie the direction to be used for the draft analysis. Usually,
the pull direction is the direction in which the mold opens. If in a mold
model, the system automatically uses the pull direction by default, but you
can also specify your own direction reference.
You must also specify the following options:
• Draft angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check for.

• Sample – Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated.
Options include Quality, Number, and Step.
• Quality – Adjusts the quality of the plot.
When you perform a Draft analysis, the system produces a color plot of the
draft angles. Based on the coloring, you can identify areas that do not have
sufficien draft angles, or incorrect direction draft angles. There are two
different types of color plots you can display:
• 3-Color Plot – Displays a three color plot in the graphics window.

Sufficien positive draft angles appear in blue, sufficien negative draft
angles appear in red, and insufficien angles appear in white.
• Rainbow Plot – Displays the color scale as a rainbow plot.
y
You can specify the number of colors to display, and whether the color scale
nl
is shown as continuous or non-continuous.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Performing a Draft Check
Analysis\Draft_Check DRAFT-CHECK.PRT
Task 1: Perform a draft check on a part model.

2. In the ribbon, select the
Applications tab.
y
3. Click Mold/Cast from the
Engineering group.
nl
O
4. Click Draft
group.
from the Analysis
se
U
5. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT
al
from the model tree.

6. In the Draft Analysis dialog box,
rn
clear the Use the pull direction

check box.
te
7. Right-click in the graphics

window and select Direction
In
Collector.
8. Select datum plane TOP from
C
the model tree.

PT
9. Edit the draft angle to 3 if

necessary.
10. Rotate the model so that you can
r
view the pegs underneath.

Fo
11. Notice that there is positive draft

on the pegs and it needs to be
negative.

click Flip.
13. Notice that the colors and angle
values have reversed.
14. Click OK from the Draft Analysis
dialog box.

Draft 3 and select Edit .
16. Edit the draft angle to -3 and
click twice in the background to
finis editing the model.
17. Click Draft .

18. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT
y
nl
clear the Use the pull direction
check box.
O
window and select Direction
se
Collector.
21. Select datum plane TOP from
U
the model tree.
22. Notice that the pegs are now
al
drafted the correct way for

molding.
rn

te
edit the Draft angle to 4

24. In the Color Scale dialog box,
In
click Expand .
• Edit the number of colors to 3.
C
PT
25. Click Rainbow Plot .

r
Fo
26. Click 3-Color Plot .

27. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.

Performing a Section Thickness Check
You can perform a section thickness check on a part model to
check for maximum or minimum thickness at specified locations.
• Two methods:
– Select one or more planes.
– Select references to create
incremental slices.
• Two checks available:
– Maximum thickness.
– Minimum thickness.
y
• Interface is slightly different in
nl
part model versus manufacturing Figure 1 – Displaying Section
model.
O
Thickness Cross-Sections Through
Selected Planes
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Displaying Section

In
Thickness Cross-Sections
Through Slices
C
Performing a Section Thickness Check on a Model

PT
You can perform a thickness check on a model by selecting the Analysis tab
in the ribbon, and then clicking Section Thickness from the Model Report
group. You can measure thickness using either of the following methods:
r
Fo
• Select one or more planes through which the thickness is measured. You
can press CTRL to select multiple planar references.
• Select references to create incremental cross-section slices through which
thickness is measured. To create these incremental slices, you must
specify the following references:
– From slices – This specifie the start point of slicing. You can select
either vertices or datum points for this reference.
– To slices – This specifie the end point of slicing. Again, you can select
either vertices or datum points for this reference.
– Direction – This specifie the direction of slicing. If necessary, you can
click the direction arrow in the graphics window to fli the direction of
slicing to point between the From Slices and To Slices references.
Once you have specifie the correct slicing references, you can specify
the following options:

– Use number of slices – This specifie the number of slices to be created
between the selected references.
– Offset – The incremental offset value that separates each cross-sectional
slice.
The Slices reference collectors become grayed out if you select a
Plane reference to perform the thickness check.
You can configur the system to perform the following two thickness checks
at each specifie reference:
• Maximum – Checks for maximum thickness. The system performs a
maximum thickness check based on the value you have specifie .
• Minimum – Checks for minimum thickness. The system performs a
y
minimum thickness check based on the value you have specifie .
nl
The Thickness dialog box displays the results for each thickness
O
cross-section location. When you select a result in the dialog box, the
thickness cross-section displays in the graphics window. The Thickness
dialog box also indicates whether the thickness at each cross-section
se
surpassed the minimum or maximum thicknesses specifie .
U
Performing a Section Thickness Check in a Manufacturing Model
You can also perform a section thickness check in the mold model by clicking
al
Section Thickness from the Analysis group in the Mold tab. Because the
rn
section thickness check occurs within the context of an assembly, you must
specify the part that the thickness check is to be performed on.
te
Once the part is specified the thickness check is similar to that of the model
In
analysis thickness check, although the interface is slightly different. You can
either select one or more planes through which to measure the thickness, or
you can have the system create slices based on selected references. The
C
system can check for both maximum and minimum thickness based on the
specifie thickness value you provide, and the results appear in the Model
PT
Analysis dialog box similar to those of the Thickness dialog box.

r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Performing a Section Thickness Check
Analysis\Section-Thickness_Check THICKNESS-CHECK.PRT
Task 1: Perform a thickness check on a part model.

Display types: .
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.
y
3. Click the Model Report group
nl
O
Section Thickness .
4. Press CTRL and select datum
se
planes FRONT, TOP, and
RIGHT.
U
5. In the Thickness dialog box, edit
the Maximum value to 0.2 and
al
click Preview.
• Notice that the #1 and #2
rn
results have an area of

thickness greater than 0.2.
te
• Select the #2 result, and notice

that it highlights in the graphics
In
window.
6. In the Thickness dialog box, click
C
Show All.
PT
• Notice that all three results

highlight in the graphics
window.
r
• Click Clear.
Fo

7. In the Thickness dialog box,
right-click in the Planes collector
and select Remove All.
• Click in the From slices
collector and select datum
point PNT0.
• Select datum point PNT1 as
the To slices reference.
• Select datum plane RIGHT for
the Direction collector.
• Edit the Offset to 2.
y
• Clear the Maximum check
nl
box.
• Select the Minimum check
O
box and edit the value to 0.15.
• Click Preview.
8. Click Show All.
se
U
9. Click OK from the Thickness
dialog box.
al
rn
te
In
Task 2: Perform a thickness check in a mold cavity.

C
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click

PT
MFG_THICKNESS.ASM.
2. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Section
r
Thickness .
Fo
3. Select the model from the graphics window.

4. In the Model Analysis dialog
box, click Slices for the Setup
Thickness Check.
the Start Point.
the End Point.
• Select datum plane
MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
the Slice Direction.
• Click Okay from the menu
y
manager to accept the upward
nl
direction.
• Select the Use number of
O
slices check box and edit the
value to 6 slices.
se
• Edit the Slice Offset to 1.
• Clear the Max check box and
U
select the Min check box,
editing its value to 0.3.
al
• Click Compute.
• Click Close.
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Performing a Thickness Check
You can perform a 3-D thickness check on a part model to check
for maximum or minimum thickness violations.
• Measure:
– All solid geometry.
– Individually selected surfaces.
• Two thickness checks available:
– Maximum thickness
– Minimum thickness
y
• You can specify:
nl
– Minimum/Maximum thickness
values. Figure 1 – Viewing Min and Max
O
– Minimum/Maximum thickness Thickness Violations
color.
se
– Neutral color.
– Post processing.
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Viewing Post Processed

Min and Max Thickness Violations
In
Performing a Thickness Check

C
You can perform a 3-D thickness check on a part model to check for
maximum or minimum thickness violations. The thickness check reduces the
PT
time to analyze wall thickness of complicated parts.
The Thickness option is available in multiple places in the Creo

r
Parametric user interface:

Fo
• In Part mode:
– In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.
• In Mold mode:
– In the Mold tab, within the Analysis group.
– In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.
– In the Analysis tab, within the Mold Analysis group.
In the Measure dialog box, you can measure thickness within all solid
geometry or individually selected surfaces. You can specify the following:
• Minimum thickness value – Checks for minimum thickness. The system
performs a minimum thickness check based on the value you have
specifie . Areas that violate the minimum thickness specifie (areas where
the thickness is less than the specifie value) highlight in the model in
purple.

• Maximum thickness value – Checks for maximum thickness. The system
performs a maximum thickness check based on the value you have
specifie . Areas that violate the maximum thickness specifie (areas where
the thickness is more than the specifie value) highlight in the model in red.
• Minimum thickness color – Specify a different minimum thickness color
than the default purple.
• Neutral color – Specify a different neutral color than the default gray.
• Maximum thickness color – Specify a different maximum thickness color
than the default red.
• Tolerance – Specify the allowable error for the calculation.
• Use post-processing – Selecting this check box causes the system to post
process the results to improve quality and accuracy.
y
Minimum thickness results display in the graphics window within an on-screen
nl
panel. You can drag this panel as well as collapse it. You can restore it by
clicking its on-screen icon.
O
You can also view minimum thickness results by expanding the Results area
se
of the Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this
Results table to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.
U
You can save the measurement by clicking Save Analysis from the
Measure dialog box. Save the measurement as either of the following types:
al
• Feature – Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model

rn
tree.
• Analysis – Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can
te
specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so you can easily
identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis by clicking
In
Saved Analysis from the Manage group in the Analysis tab.

C
Measurement Options
PT
Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking
Measure Options . The following options are available:
r
• Units by Model – Units are the same as those of the model.

Fo
• Length Units – Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list.
• Decimal Places – Specify the number of decimal places displayed for
measurements.
• Show Feature Tab – Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box,
enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parameters
for a given measurement.
• Use automatic compute – Automatically computes the new measurement if
different references are selected for measuring.
• Panel display – You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in
the graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them or
expanding them.

PROCEDURE - Performing a Thickness Check
Analysis\3-D_Thickness 3-D_THICKNESS.PRT
Task 1: Perform a thickness check on a part model.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.
y
3. Click Thickness from the
Model Report group.
nl
O
4. Select the 3-D geometry in the
graphics window. se
U
5. In the Measure dialog box, edit
the Minimum value to 0.18.
al
• Edit the Maximum value to

rn
0.50.
• Click Compute.
te
• Drag the panel approximately

as shown.
In
The areas shaded in

purple are thinner than the
C
minimum specifie value

of 0.18. The areas shaded
PT
in red are thicker than the

maximum specifie value of
0.5.
r
Fo
6. In the Measure dialog box, select

the Use post-processing check
box.
• Click Compute.
• Notice that the accuracy
has improved in terms of
color-coding the model areas
that violate the minimum and
maximum thicknesses.
• Click Close.

Module 4
y
Mold Models
nl
O
Module Overview
se
You start the mold design process by creating a mold model. You assemble
and orient the reference model that represents the design model being
molded. You can also pattern or assemble the reference part multiple times
U
to create multi-cavity molds.
al
In this module, you learn how to create mold models and assemble the
reference model into it.
rn
Objectives
te

In
• Create new mold models.

• Recognize the differences between absolute and relative accuracy.
C
• Locate, assemble, and create the reference model.

• Learn the different parts of the reference model that you can redefin .
PT
• Explain the differences between the methods for reference model

orientation.
r
• Explain the different types of mold cavity layout and orientation you can use
Fo
on the mold model.

• Calculate the projected area of the reference model.

Creating New Mold Models
Your company can create customized templates for creating
new mold models.
• A mold model consists of:

– A reference model
– Workpieces
– Mold components
– Molding
• File extension is .asm
y
Figure 1 – New Mold Model Tree
• Use customized mold
nl
manufacturing templates.
O
• Mold templates include:
– Datums
se
– Pull Direction
– Layers
U
– Units
– Parameters
al
– View Orientations
rn
• You can modify pull direction.

te
In
Figure 2 – New Mold Model

C
Creating New Mold Models

PT
A mold model is the model you work on while in Mold Cavity Design mode, or
Mold mode. The mold model, which has a fil extension of .asm, contains
the following:
r
• A reference model.
Fo
• One or more workpieces that represent the overall size of cavity inserts.
• Several mold components that represent cavity inserts.
• One molding component that represents the product of the molding
process.
The remainder of this course focuses on the creation of these items.
You can create new mold models within Creo Parametric either by using
File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the mold and
decide whether to use a default template or a template at all. Unless you
select the Empty template, the new mold displays in the graphics window
with some default datum features.

Using Templates
You should create new mold models using a template. Mold templates are
similar to part and assembly templates in that they enable you to create a
new mold with predefine general information. Your company has probably
created customized templates, as they contain your company's standards.
Using a template to create a new mold is beneficia because it means that
regardless of who created it, the mold contains the same consistent set of
information, including:
• Datums – Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and a
default coordinate system, all named appropriately.
• Default Pull Direction – The direction in which the mold opens.
y
• Layers – When every mold, part, and assembly contains the same layers, it
is easier to manage both the layers and items on the layer.
nl
• Units – Most companies have a company standard for units in their molds.
O
Creating every mold with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are
not made.
se
• Parameters – Every mold can have the same standard metadata
information.
• View Orientations – Having every mold contain the same standard view
U
orientations aids the molding process.
al
Modifying the Default Pull Direction

rn
The default pull direction is visible on the model as a double set of arrows,
as shown in Figure 2. It is used as a default direction for all mold-specifi
te
features and analysis depending on the pull direction. You can toggle the pull
direction display on and off by clicking Pull Direction Display from the
In
In Graphics toolbar. You can also change the direction of the default pull
direction by clicking Pull Direction from the Design Features group in
C
the ribbon. The reference you select causes the pull direction to become
perpendicular to that reference. Keep in mind that if you modify the default
PT
pull direction within a mold model created using a template, you should
rename the datum planes appropriately.
r
The pull direction value is not parametric. This means that features
Fo
built before resetting the default pull direction use the earlier
direction value. They are not updated when you reset the default
pull direction. Therefore, it is recommended that you do not modify
the pull direction after a certain point in the mold process.

PROCEDURE - Creating New Mold Models
Mold\New CREATE NEW
Task 1: Create a new mold model by selecting a template.
1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.

• Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD.
y
• Clear the Use default template check box.
nl
• Click OK.
O
2. In the New File Options dialog
box, click Browse.
• Double-click MMNS_MFG_
MOLD.ASM. se
U
• Click OK.
al
Display types: .
rn
4. Notice that an assembly of the

same name as the mold cavity is
te
created in the model tree.

In
5. Explore the default datum

features created in the graphics
window and model tree.
C
6. Notice the PULL DIRECTION.

r PT
Fo
7. Click Pull Direction Display

from the In Graphics toolbar to
disable the pull direction display.
8. Click Pull Direction Display
again to toggle it back on.

9. In the model tree, click Show
and select Layer Tree. Notice
the default layers.
10. Click Show and select Model
Tree.
11. Click File > Prepare > Model

Properties to access the Model
y
Properties dialog box.
nl
12. In the Materials section, click
change in the Units row. Notice
O
the units that are set.
13. Click Close > Close.
14. Click Saved Orientations se

U
from the In Graphics
toolbar. Notice the default view
al
orientations.
15. Select view orientation FRONT.
rn
16. Notice that the PULL

te
DIRECTION for the mold

points upward from the parting
In
plane.
17. Click Saved Orientations
C
and select Standard

Orientation.
PT
18. Click Pull Direction from the

Design Features group in the
r
ribbon.
Fo

MOLD_FRONT and click
OK from the Pull Direction dialog
box.

Task 2: Create a new mold model by selecting a different template.
1. Click New .
• Select Manufacturing as the
Type and Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
• Edit the Name to
NEW_MOLD_ENGLISH.
• Clear the Use default
template check box.
y
• Click OK.
nl
2. In the New File Options dialog
box, select the inlbs_mfg_mold
O
template.
• Click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features
and PULL DIRECTION. se
U
al

Properties.
rn

change in the Units row. Notice
te
the units that are set.

6. Click Close > Close.
In
C

r PT
Fo

Analyzing Model Accuracy
One of the most important factors affecting the mold design
process is model accuracy.
• Types of accuracy:
– Relative
– Absolute
• Automatically controlling
accuracy in mold model Figure 1 – Confirmatio for
Automatically Changing Accuracy
• Implications of changing
accuracy
y
nl
• When does accuracy need to
be changed?
O
se
Figure 2 – Viewing an Accuracy
Conflic
U
Analyzing Model Accuracy
al
One of the most important factors affecting the mold design process is model
rn
accuracy. Creo Parametric provides the following types of accuracy settings:

• Relative – This type of accuracy is specifie as a fraction of the longest
te
diagonal of the bounding box of a model. The default relative accuracy is

0.0012.
In
• Absolute – This type of accuracy improves the matching of models of

different sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported models
C
created on another system). To avoid potential problems when adding new

features to a model, it is recommended that you set the reference model to
PT
absolute accuracy before adding additional parts to the model. Absolute

accuracy is useful when you are doing the following:
– Copying geometry from one mold to another during core operations.
r
– Designing models for manufacturing and mold design.

Fo
– Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination model.

You can match the accuracies of a set of models in one of the two following
ways:
• Give them all the same absolute accuracies.
• Designate the smallest model as the base model, and assign its accuracy
to the other models.
Automatically Controlling Accuracy

You can perform the following steps to automatically set the correct accuracy
when creating mold models:
• Set the configuratio fil option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes.
• Create a new mold model. It receives a default (absolute) accuracy value.

• Add the firs reference model. If a discrepancy exists between the
assembly model accuracy and reference model accuracy, the system
issues a warning and prompts you to confir changing the assembly
model accuracy, as shown in Figure 1. If you accept, then Creo Parametric
switches the assembly model accuracy from relative to absolute, and sets
it to the value corresponding to the accuracy of the reference model. If you
do not accept, the system warns you that there is an accuracy conflict and
generates a text fil with a *.acc fil extension in the working directory.
• Create the mold workpiece using the automatic workpiece creation
functionality. The accuracy of the workpiece is automatically set to be the
same as the accuracy of the assembly model.
Implications and Guidelines of Changing Accuracy
y
When you change the accuracy of a model you are changing the
nl
computational accuracy of geometry calculations. The accuracy of a mold
model is relative to the size of the resultant molding component. The valid
O
range for accuracy is 0.01 to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012.
However, the configuratio fil option, accuracy_lower_bound, can override
se
the lower boundary of this range. The specifie values for the lower boundary
must be between 0.000001 and 0.0001.
U
If you increase the accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. Use the
default accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the
al
accuracy to a value less than half the ratio of the length of the smallest edge
on the model to the length of the largest diagonal of a box that would contain
rn
the model. Use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so.
te
Situations for Changing Accuracy

In
The following are situations that may cause you to have to change accuracy:
• Placing a small feature on a model.
C
• Intersecting two models of very different size. For the two models to be
PT
compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To achieve this,
estimate each model size, and multiply each by its respective current
accuracy. If the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the models
that yields the same results for each. You might need to increase the mold
r
accuracy of the larger model by entering a smaller decimal number. For

Fo
example, if the size of the smaller model is 100 and the accuracy is .01,
the product of these numbers is 1. If the size of the larger model is 1000
and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 10. Change the
accuracy of the larger model to .001 to yield the same product.
When an accuracy conflic exists, the system warns you in the Message Log
and generate a *.acc fil that is saved in the working directory. You can view
this text fil to determine where the conflic exists and modify the accuracies
accordingly. The contents of an accuracy fil are shown in Figure 2.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Model Accuracy
Mold\Accuracy MFG_ACCURACY.ASM
Task 1: Modify the accuracy of models in a mold model.
The purpose of this procedure is to show you how to change

accuracy manually. If you specify the reference part and use
automatic workpiece creation during the mold process, you are
automatically prompted to change accuracy.
y
nl
2. Notice the warning in the Message Log stating that there is an
O
accuracy conflic .
se
U
3. Click Folder Browser from
al
the Navigator and click Working

.
rn
Directory
• Click in the right, empty portion
te
of the address bar to highlight

its contents.
In
• Press END, type

mfg_accuracy.acc, and
press ENTER.
C
4. Review the accuracy conflic

PT
report for the manufacturing

assembly.
5. Click Show Browser to
r
Fo
collapse the browser.
6. Select Model Tree from the Navigator.

• Click Add.
• Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.

Properties to access the Model
change in the Accuracy row.
10. In the Accuracy dialog box,
select Copying value from
model and click Browse.
11. Double-click MFG_
ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the
Open dialog box.
y
12. Click Regenerate from the
nl
Accuracy dialog box.
O
13. Notice that the accuracy has
been changed to Absolute
0.0046.
14. Click Close from the Model
Properties dialog box. se
U
15. Right-click ACCURACY_WRK.PRT and select Open .
al
16. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.

rn
17. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row.

te
18. In the Accuracy dialog box,

select Copying value from
In
model and click Browse.

19. Double-click MFG_
ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the
C
Open dialog box.

PT
20. Click Regenerate.

21. Notice that the accuracy has
been changed to Absolute
r
0.0046.
Fo
22. Click Close from the Model

23. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to

MFG_ACCURACY.ASM.
24. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
25. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All
and OK to erase the model from memory.

26. Click Working Directory
and double-click
MFG_ACCURACY.ASM to
open it.
27. Notice that there is no longer an
accuracy conflic in the Message
Log. All components in the mold
manufacturing model are set
to the same absolute accuracy
value.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Locating the Reference Model
The reference model usually represents the part that is to be
molded.
• Locate Reference Model:

– Most versatile of the three
methods available.
– Specify a pre-define Layout.
– Specify a pre-define
Orientation.
y
– Matches accuracy if absolute
nl
accuracy is enabled.
• You can specify the Reference
O
model type. Figure 1 – Reference Model
Located into Mold Model
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Model Trees for Merge by Reference, Same Model,

and Inherited Reference Model Types
r
Fo
Reference Model Background

The firs component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded.
The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes
the mold cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets and shrinkage
that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model
contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These
elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design
process.

Locating the Reference Model
Locating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting
the reference model into the mold model, and is the most versatile of the
three. The reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different
than that of a conventional part model, regardless of the method used to
insert it.
You can use Locate Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing model

as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to
further select a pre-define Layout and Orientation for the reference model.
When locating the reference model, you can specify the Reference model
type:
y
• Merge by reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry
nl
into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the
geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model.
O
If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in
a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum
se
planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any
changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design
U
model. The default name for the new reference model created with
this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if
the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
al
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design

model automatically propagate to the reference model.
rn
• Same model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference
model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes
te
made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are
In
actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot

rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original
design model.
C
• Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature

PT
information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature.

You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify
on the inherited reference model without changing the original design
model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model
r
without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference
Fo
model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference
method, the default name for the new reference model created with this
method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made
to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference
model.
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confir
the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model
accuracy to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is located into the mold model, the resulting
geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method
used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to
determine the method used.

PROCEDURE - Locating the Reference Model
Mold\Reference-Model_Locate REF-MODEL_MERGE.ASM
Task 1: Locate the reference model as a merge model.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

• Click Add.
y
nl
• Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.
O
3. In the ribbon, select Locate
Reference Model from
se
the Reference Model types
U
group.
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from
al
the Open dialog box.

rn

dialog box, select Merge by
te
reference as the Reference

model type.
In
• Notice the Design model.

• Edit the Reference model
C
Name to BUTTON_REF and

click OK.
PT
6. Click OK from the Layout dialog

box.
r
7. Click OK from the Warning dialog

Fo
box to change the accuracy.

menu manager.
9. Click Regenerate from the
Quick Access toolbar.
10. Expand BUTTON_REF.PRT in

the model tree.
11. Notice that the reference model
only contains an external merge
feature.

Task 2: Locate the reference model as the same model.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click

REF-MODEL_SAME.ASM.
2. Click Locate Reference Model .
3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same model as
the Reference model type.
• Notice the Reference model Name, and that the fiel is grayed out.
y
• Click OK.
nl
box.
O
box.
menu manager. se
U
8. Click Regenerate .
al
rn
9. Expand BUTTON.PRT in the model tree.

10. Notice that the reference model is the original model.
te
Locate the reference model as an inheritance.

In
Task 3:
1. Click Open and double-click REF-MODEL_INHERITED.ASM.

C
PT
2. Click Locate Reference Model .

3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Inherited as the
r
Reference model type.

Fo
• Edit the Reference model Name to BUTTON_REF_I and click OK.

box.
box.
menu manager.
8. Click Regenerate .

9. Expand BUTTON_REF_I.PRT in
the model tree.
only contains an external
inheritance feature.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Assembling the Reference Model
molded.
• Assemble Reference Model:
– Uses a previously created
model.
– Uses conventional assembly
placement constraints.
– Matches accuracy if absolute
accuracy is enabled.
y
• You can specify the Reference
nl
Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference
model type. Model in the Model Tree
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference Figure 3 – Viewing the Assembled

Model using Constraints Reference Model
C

PT
r

Fo
the mold cavity.

process.
Assembling the Reference Model

Assembling the reference model is one of three methods available for
inserting the reference model into the mold model. The reference model icon
that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part
model, regardless of the method used to insert it.

You can use Assemble Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing
model as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you
to use conventional Assembly mode placement constraints to assemble the
reference model. Unlike the Locate Reference Model option, you cannot
further specify a Layout and Orientation.
You can redefin the reference model, however, to specify a Layout

and Orientation.
Similar to the Locate Reference Model option, you can specify the Reference
model type:
• Merge by reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry
into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the
y
geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model.
nl
If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in
a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum
O
planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any
changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design
se
model. The default name for the new reference model created with
this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if
the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
U
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design
model automatically propagate to the reference model.
al
• Same model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference
rn
model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes
made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are
actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot
te
rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original
design model.
In
• Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature

information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature.
C
You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify
on the inherited reference model without changing the original design
PT
model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model

without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference
model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference
r
method, the default name for the new reference model created with this
Fo
method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made

to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference
model.
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confir
the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model
accuracy to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is assembled into the mold model, the resulting
geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method
used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to
determine the method used.

PROCEDURE - Assembling the Reference Model
Mold\Reference-Model_Assemble
REF-MODEL_ASSEMBLE.ASM
Task 1: Assemble the reference model using placement constraints.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

y
• Click Add.
nl
O
3. In the ribbon, select Assemble
se
U
group.
al
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from

rn
the Open dialog box.

5. Notice that you can now
te
assemble the reference model

using conventional placement
In
constraints.
6. In the graphics window,
C
select coordinate system

MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
PT
assembly reference.
• Select coordinate system
PRT_CSYS_DEF as the
r
component reference.
Fo
7. Click Complete Component

from the dashboard.

dialog box, select Merge by
reference as the Reference
model type.
• Edit the Reference model
Name to BUTTON_REF and
click OK.
box to edit the accuracy.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating the Reference Model
molded.
• Create Reference Model:

– Creates a new model on-the-fl .
– Uses conventional component
creation methods.
– Uses conventional assembly
placement constraints.
y
• You cannot specify the Reference
model type.
nl
Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference
Model in the Model Tree
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 3 – Reference Model

Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference
C
Created from Empty Template

Model using Constraints
PT

r
Fo

the mold cavity.
process.
Creating the Reference Model

Creating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting
the reference model into the mold model and offers the least fl xibility. The

reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a
conventional part model, regardless of the method used to insert it.
You can use Create Reference Model to create a new model on-the-fl
and assemble it as the reference model into the mold model using
conventional Assembly mode placement constraints. This option is similar
to creating a new component in Assembly mode. In fact, the same creation
options are available:
• Copy from existing – Creates a copy of an existing model. This could be an
existing design model or an empty template of your company standards.
• Locate default datums – Creates the model and enables you to locate
the default datums in the assembly.
y
• Empty – Creates the model without geometry or datum features.
nl
• Create features – Creates the model using existing assembly references.
O
With this method you cannot specify the Reference model type. There are
also no pre-define options available for Layout or Orientation, and there are
no further locating options or accuracy matching.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating the Reference Model
Mold\Reference-Model_Create BUTTON.PRT
Task 1: Create the reference model from an existing design model.

Display types: .
2. Notice the model geometry.
y
3. Click Close from the Quick
nl
Access toolbar.
O
se
U
• Click Add.
al

rn
5. Click Open from the Quick

te
Access toolbar and double-click

In
REF-MODEL_COPY-FROM.
ASM.
6. In the ribbon, select Create
C

PT

r
group.
Fo
7. In the Create Component

dialog box, edit the Name to
BUTTON_REF.
• Click OK.
8. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as
the Creation Method.
• Click Browse.
• Double-click BUTTON.PRT.
• Click OK.

constraints.
10. Notice that the geometry was
copied from the BUTTON.PRT
model.
11. Enable Csys Display .
select coordinate system
MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
y
assembly reference.
nl
• Select coordinate system
PRT_CSYS_DEF as the
O
component reference.
se
13. Click Complete Component
from the dashboard.
U
Task 2: Create the reference model from an empty template.
al
1. Click Open and double-click

rn
REF-MODEL_CREATE.ASM.
2. Select Create Reference Model
te

In

group.
C
3. In the Create Component

PT
dialog box, edit the name to

BUTTON_REF_NEW.
• Click OK.
r
4. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as

Fo
the Creation Method.

• Click Browse.
• Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
• Click OK.

constraints.
window and select Default
Constraint.
y
nl
O
7. Click Complete Component .
se
You could now activate the reference model and create geometry
as desired.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Redefining the Reference Model
You can redefine certain items related to the reference model
once it is placed within the mold model.
• You can redefin the following
reference model related items:
– Reference model orientation.
– Mold cavity layout.
– Mold cavity layout orientation.
• You cannot change the reference
model to a different reference
y
model.
nl
• Switching reference model
methods:
O
– Inherited and Merge by
Reference only.
– You cannot switch between
Same Model and another se
U
method.
al
rn
te
Figure 1 – Layout Dialog Box when

In
Redefinin Reference Model
Redefining the Reference Model

C
You can redefin the reference model by selecting Locate Reference Model
PT
from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model
& Workpiece group and then clicking Redefin from the menu manager. You
can redefin the following items related to the reference model:
r
Fo
• Reference model orientation – You can adjust the reference model origin
and orientation within the mold model. You can do this by either adjusting
the reference model coordinate system or the mold model's coordinate
system.
• Mold cavity layout – You can adjust the quantity and layout of the mold
cavities created within the mold model.
• Mold cavity layout orientation – You can adjust the orientation of the mold
cavities created within the mold model.
You cannot change the current reference model to a different
reference model.
You can perform these functions on reference models that were

located or assembled, but not reference models that were directly
created in the mold model.

Switching Reference Model Methods
If you have located or assembled the reference model using the Same Model
method, you cannot redefin the method to switch it to Merge by reference or
Inherited. Conversely, if you located or assembled the reference model using
either Merge by reference or Inherited, you cannot redefin the method to
Same Model. In either of these cases you must delete the reference model
from the mold model and recreate it.
You can switch the reference model creation method back and forth between
Merge by reference and Inheritance, however. You can do this by editing the
definitio of the External Merge or External Inheritance feature within the
reference model, depending on the type of creation method used. You can
then toggle the inheritance on or off in the dashboard. Keep in mind that
y
in switching back and forth you will lose any geometry that was varied in
nl
the inheritance feature, and the resulting geometry may change, potentially
causing other geometry to fail.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation
You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the
mold model.
• The system lines up
coordinate systems from
the reference model and
mold model.
• Modify reference model
orientation:
– Standard
y
♦ Select a coordinate
system.
nl
– Dynamic
O
♦ Modify orientation of Figure 1 – Using Standard Orientation
REF_ORIGIN.
• Other dynamic options:
– Projected area se
U
– Draft check
– Bounding box
al
information
rn
Figure 2 – Using Dynamic Orientation

te
Analyzing Reference Model Orientation

In
You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the mold model.
When you select the reference model to be added to the mold model, the
system selects a coordinate system from the reference model and assembles
C
it to a coordinate system from the mold model.

PT
Modifying the Reference Model Orientation

You can modify the reference model orientation within the mold model either
r
by specifying a different mold layout coordinate system or by specifying a

Fo
different reference model coordinate system.

There are two different methods that you can use to specify a different
coordinate system in the reference model:
• Standard – Enables you to select a different, existing, coordinate system in
the reference model. A separate window opens that contains the reference
model, enabling you to select the coordinate system, as shown in Figure 1.
• Dynamic – A separate window opens that contains the reference model.
However, a new coordinate system called REF_ORIGIN is created in the
reference model, and you can dynamically reorient this coordinate system
so that it will line up properly with the mold layout coordinate system.
In the separate window that contains the reference model, the X, Y, and
Z-directions of the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system are displayed, and
the positive Z-direction is the same as the PULL DIRECTION in the
mold model. Also, the Parting Plane displays to show you a surface

perpendicular to the pull direction. Figure 2 shows the REF_ORIGIN
coordinate system orientation and Parting Plane and the resulting
orientation in the mold model.
You can dynamically adjust the coordinate system orientation in the
reference model window, and the parting plane also adjusts dynamically.
The following options are available for adjusting the REF_ORIGIN
coordinate system orientation:
– Rotate – Enables you to rotate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system
about the X, Y, and Z axes, either by typing a value or by dragging
a slider.
– Translate – Enables you to translate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
system in the X, Y, and Z directions, either by typing a value or by
dragging a slider. You can also click Midpoint to automatically translate
y
the parting plane to a midpoint of the model in that direction.
nl
– Move to a point – Enables you to move the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
O
system origin to a specifie point in the reference model. There are
two options available:
se
♦ Selection – Enables you to select a vertex, datum point, or other
coordinate system as the new coordinate system origin.
♦ Model center – Moves the coordinate system origin to the model
U
center.
– Align an axis – Enables you to align the X, Y, or Z Axis of the
al
REF_ORIGIN coordinate system to a specifie datum plane, curve,

rn
edge, axis, or other coordinate system.

te
Reference Model Dynamic Orientation Options

When you are dynamically reorienting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system,
In
the following additional options are available within the Reference Model
Orientation dialog box:
C
• Projected area – Determines the area projected onto the Parting Plane
PT
as define by the current orientation of the reference model in the mold

model. The Projected Area is calculated based on the current orientation
after Update is clicked.
• Undo/Redo – Enables you to undo or redo the last action performed.
r
Fo
• Draft check – Enables a draft angle to be specifie and performs a draft

check on the reference model's current orientation by clicking Shade. This
shades the model like a conventional draft check with the three colors
blue, magenta, and yellow.
Figure 3 – Draft Check

• Bounding box information – Provides positive and negative distances
from the model origin to the edges of the bounding box. This information
updates as the part is moved and cannot be edited.
Figure 4 – Bounding Box Information
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Reference Model Orientation
Mold\Reference-Model_Orientation REF-ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Orient the reference model using dynamic orientation.

Display types:
2. The model is not in the proper
orientation with respect to the
y
PULL DIRECTION.
nl
O
group.
4. Click Redefine from the menu se
U
manager.
al
5. Click Reference Model Origin

from the Layout dialog box.
rn
6. Click Dynamic from the menu

manager.
te
7. Notice the Parting Plane and the

In
positive Z-direction.
C
8. In the Reference Model

PT
Orientation dialog box, verify that

Rotate is specifie for the X Axis.
• Drag the slider to the right until
r
about 90, then edit the Value

Fo
to 90 and press ENTER.

• Notice the Parting Plane and
the positive Z-direction.
• Click OK.

9. Click Preview.
tab.
11. Enable Plane Tag Display .
13. Notice that the orientation
is now correct for the PULL
DIRECTION, but that the
MAIN_PARTING_PLN is on the
top of the model.
y
nl
O
15. Click Dynamic from the menu
manager.
se
16. In the Reference Model
Orientation dialog box, select
Translate and select the Z Axis.
U
• Drag the slider all the way to
al
the left so the Value is -7.00

and notice the Parting Plane.
rn
• Click OK.
17. Click Preview from the Layout
te
dialog box.
In
18. Notice that the MAIN_PARTING_

PLN is now on the bottom.
C

box and Done/Return from the
PT
menu manager.
Orient the reference model using standard orientation.

r
Task 2:
Fo
1. In the model tree, expand REF-MODEL.PRT.

2. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters
.
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects
check box and click OK.
4. Right-click STD_CSYS and select Resume.

5. Click Locate Reference Model
and click Redefine from the
menu manager.
7. Verify that the coordinate system
type is Standard in the menu
manager.
8. Select coordinate system
STD_CSYS.
y
nl
box.
O
menu manager.
tab.
12. Disable Plane Tag Display . se
U
al

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout
You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities.
• The following mold cavity layout

– Single
– Rectangular
– Circular
– Variable
y
nl
Figure 1 – Single Cavity Mold
Model Layout
O
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Rectangular Cavity Figure 3 – Circular Cavity

In
Mold Model Layout Mold Model Layout

C
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout

PT
You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities. When you create
a multiple-cavity layout in the mold model, the system creates a pattern of
the reference model to create the multiple cavities.
r
The following layout options are available:

Fo
• Single – Places a single cavity, or single instance, of the reference model

in the mold model. A Single cavity layout is shown in Figure 1.
• Rectangular – Places the reference model in a rectangular layout in the
mold model. A Rectangular cavity layout is shown in Figure 2. The
following options are available for the Rectangular layout:
– Cavities – Specifie the number of cavities, or number of pattern
instances of the reference model, in the X and Y directions. You can
either edit the number or use the up and down arrows to increase or
decrease the number of cavities in each direction.
– Increment – Specifie the distance between origins of reference models
in the X and Y directions.
The X and Y directions are determined by the mold model coordinate
system's X and Y axes.

• Circular – Places the reference model in a circular layout in the mold
model. A Circular cavity layout is shown in Figure 3. The following options
are available for the Circular layout:
– Cavities – Specifie the number of cavities, or number of pattern
instances of the reference model, in the mold model.
– Radius – Specifie the radius value around which the cavities are placed.
– Start Angle – Specifie the angular distance in degrees about the mold
model's Z-axis that the firs reference model's origin is placed. You can
specify a negative value.
– Increment – Specifie the angular distance between cavities in degrees.
• Variable – Enables you to place the reference model according to a
user-define pattern table.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout
Mold\Cavity-Layout CAVITY-LAYOUT.ASM
Task 1: Analyze mold cavity layout in a mold model.

Display types:
2. Notice that the mold model is a
single cavity mold.
y
nl
O
se
U
al

rn
group.
4. Click Redefine from the menu
te
manager.
5. Notice that the current Layout
In
specifie is Single.
6. Select Rectangular as the
C
Layout.
PT
• Edit the X Cavity to 3.

• Edit the Y Cavity to 3.
• Edit the X Increment to 30.
r
• Edit the Y Increment to 30.

Fo
7. Click Preview.
8. In the model tree, expand the
Pattern feature.
9. Notice that there are 9 pattern
members total.
10. These pattern members
correspond with the number
of cavities in the mold model.

11. In the Layout dialog box, edit the
X and Y Increments to 50.
• Click Preview.
y
number of Y Cavities to 2.
nl
• Click Preview.
O
se
U
Circular as the Layout.
al
• Edit the number of Cavities to

4.
rn
• Edit the Radius to 40 and click

Preview.
te
In
14. Edit the Start Angle to 30 and

C
click Preview.
PT
15. Notice that all four mold cavities

rotated 30 degrees about the
Z-axis.
r
Fo
16. Edit the Start Angle back to 0.

17. Edit the Increment to 60 and click
OK from the Layout dialog box.
menu manager.

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout
You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout
option.
• Convert an existing layout to

Variable.
• The following orientation
– Reference Rotation
– X-Translation
y
– Y-Translation
nl
– Layout Rotation
• Additional options: Figure 1 – Variable Cavity Converted
O
– Highlight from Circular Layout
– Add/Remove pattern
instance
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Variable Cavity Converted

C
from Single Layout

PT
Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout

You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout option. When
you select the Variable option, the existing cavity layout is converted to the
r
Variable format, and the Variable table appears in the Layout dialog box.
Fo
Each pattern instance (reference model) displays in the left-most column,

and the variables that vary orientation are displayed in the right columns, as
shown in the figure . At this point, you can adjust the orientation for each
pattern member independently of the others.
The following orientation options are available for each pattern instance in
the Variable table:
• Reference Rotation — Rotates the reference model (pattern

instance) about its origin.
• X-Translation — Translates the reference model along its positive
or negative X-axis.
• Y-Translation — Translates the reference model along its positive
or negative Y-axis.

• Layout Rotation — Rotates reference model about mold layout
origin.
Of these four options, the Y-Translation and Layout Rotation options are not
always available, depending upon which layout was converted to Variable.
The Layout Rotation option is only available for a layout converted from
Circular, as shown in Figure 1. The Y-Translation option is only available for
a layout converted from Single or Rectangular, as shown in Figure 2.
Additional Variable cavity layout options include the following:
• Highlight — When this check box is selected, any pattern instance selected
in the Variable table highlights in the graphics window.
• Add — Enables you to add a new pattern instance to the layout. The new
y
pattern instance member is inserted immediately following the pattern
nl
instance that is selected when the Add button is clicked.
• Remove — Enables you to remove an existing pattern instance from the
O
layout. To remove a pattern instance, select it in the Variable table and
click Remove.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout
Mold\Cavity-Layout_Variable VARIABLE-LAYOUT.ASM
Task 1: Create a variable cavity layout.

Display types: .
y
nl
group and click Redefine from
O
the menu manager.
3. Notice that the Layout is a Single
cavity.
se
U
Variable as the Layout.
al
• Notice the new Variable table.

• Select the Highlight check
rn
box.
• Select VARIABLE-LAYOUT_
te
REF and notice that it

highlights in the graphics
In
window.
C
5. In the Variable table, edit the

to
PT
Reference Rotation
90.
• Edit the X-Translation
to -40.
r
Fo
• Edit the Y-Translation

to -40 and click Preview.
6. In the Layout dialog box, click
Add.
• Edit the Reference Rotation
to -90.
to -40.
to 40 and click Preview.

7. In the Variable table, select the
second pattern instance and
click Add.
to -90.
to 50.
y
third pattern instance and click
nl
Add.
O
to 90.
to -50.
se
U
al
Task 2: Modify the variable cavity layout to a different layout.

rn
1. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout, edit the
Radius to 60, and click Preview.
te
2. Select Variable as the Layout.

In

firs pattern instance and edit the
C
Reference Rotation to
PT
-90, the X-Translation

to 60, and the Layout Rotation
to 0.
r
4. Edit the remaining pattern

Fo
instance orientation values, as

shown in the table.
box.
menu manager.

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation
You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity
layout.
• Available orientations for
the following cavity layouts:
– Single
♦ Specify a different
coordinate system
– Rectangular
♦ Constant
y
Figure 1 – Rectangular Layout,
♦ X-Symmetric
nl
X-Symmetric versus Y-Symmetric
♦ Y-Symmetric Orientation
O
– Circular
♦ Constant
se
♦ Radial U
al
Figure 2 – Circular Layout, Constant

rn
versus Radial Orientation

te
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation

In
You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity layout. Examples
of reasons why cavity adjustment may be necessary include the following:
C
• More optimum layout for sprue and runner placement is required.

• More uniform cooling of parts is needed.
PT
• Manufacturing feasibility of the mold design layout.

Consider each of the mold cavity layouts and their respective options for
r
orientation.
Fo
Modifying Layout Orientation in a Single Cavity

Because there is only a single cavity, no further orientation adjustments are
available. The Orientation options become grayed out in the Layout dialog
box. Rather, you can adjust the cavity orientation in the layout by switching
coordinate systems or dynamically adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
system.
Modifying Layout Orientation in a Rectangular Cavity

The following Orientation options are available for the Rectangular cavity
layout:
• Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction.
• X-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's X-axis. That
is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation

when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's X-axis.
X-Symmetric orientation is shown in the left image of Figure 1.
• Y-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's Y-axis. That
is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation
when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's Y-axis.
Y-Symmetric orientation is shown in the right image of Figure 1.
Modifying Layout Orientation in a Circular Cavity

The following Orientation options are available for the Circular cavity layout:
• Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction, as
shown in the left image of Figure 2.
y
• Radial – Cavities are fanned about the mold model's origin. That is, the
cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when
nl
looking out radially from the mold model origin. Radial orientation is shown
in the right image of Figure 2.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation
Mold\Cavity-Layout_Orientation LAYOUT-ORIENT.ASM
Task 1: Analyze mold cavity layout orientation in a mold model.

Display types:
y
nl
group.
O
3. Click Redefine from the menu
manager.
4. In the Layout dialog box, notice
that the Layout is specifie as se
U
Rectangular.
• Notice that the Orientation is
al
specifie as Constant.
rn

Orientation to X-Symmetric.
te
• Click Preview.
In
• Notice that the cavity layout

is symmetric about the mold
model's X-axis.
C
r PT

Fo
Orientation to Y-Symmetric.
• Click Preview.
7. Notice that the cavity layout
is symmetric about the mold
model's Y-axis.

Layout to Circular.
• Edit the Orientation to
Constant if necessary.
• Edit the Radius to 30.
• Click Preview.
9. Notice that the cavities all face
the same constant direction.
y
nl
Orientation to Radial.
O
• Click Preview.
11. Notice that the cavity layout is
se
radial about the mold model's
origin.
U
al
rn

te
Layout to Single.
• Notice that all Orientation
In
options are grayed out.

• Click OK.
C

PT
menu manager.
r
Fo

Calculating Projected Area
You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to
help calculate the clamping force needed to keep a mold set
closed during operation.
• Specify the entity.

• Specify the projection direction.
• Projected area is calculated.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 1 – Calculating Projected Figure 2 – Illustration of

Area Projected Area
te
Calculating Projected Area

In
You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to help calculate
the clamping force needed to keep a mold set closed during operation. To
C
calculate the projected area, you can click Projected Area from the
PT
Analysis group. This opens the Measure dialog box.

In the Measure dialog box, you must specify the following items:
r
• Entity – Specifie the entity that is to be projected. You can select the
Fo
following entity types:

– All Ref Parts – This is the default Entity selection.
– Surface
– Quilt
– Facets
• Projection Direction – Specifie the direction that the Entity is projected.
You can specify any of the following projection direction references:
– Default Pull Direction – This is the default Projection Direction.
– None
– Plane – Enables you to select a plane that the direction is perpendicular
to.
– Line/Axis – Enables you to select a line or axis as the direction.

– Coordinate System – Enables you to select a coordinate system. Once
you select the coordinate system, you must specify which coordinate
axis define the direction.
– View Plane – Uses the current viewing plane as the projection reference.
Once you have define the entity and projection direction, you can click
Compute to calculate the projected area of the entity. The selected entity is
projected onto an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to the projection
reference, as shown in Figure 2. The area of this projection is calculated.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Calculating Projected Area
Mold\Projected-Area PROJ-AREA.ASM
Task 1: Calculate the projected area of a reference model in a mold model.

2. Click Projected Area from
the Analysis group.
y
3. In the Measure dialog box, notice
that the default Entity is All Ref
nl
Parts.
O
• Notice that the default
Projection Direction is Default
se
Pull Direction.
• Notice the projected area of
the reference model.
U
al
rn
te
4. Enable Plane Display .

In
5. In the Measure dialog box, edit

the Projection Direction to Plane.
C
• Prehighlight datum plane

MOLD_FRONT and then
PT
select it.
• Click Compute.
• Notice the updated projected
r
Fo
area.
• Click Close.

Module 5
y
Shrinkage
nl
O
Module Overview
se
You apply shrinkage to accommodate the contraction that occurs in the
reference model during cooling, and also ensure that the fina mold model
matches the original design model.
U
In this module, you learn about shrinkage and how to apply it to the reference
al
model.
rn
Objectives
te
• Explain the purpose of applying shrinkage to a mold model.

In
• Apply shrinkage by scale to the reference model.

• Apply shrinkage by dimensions to the reference model.
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Shrinkage
You can apply shrinkage to a model to compensate for the
shrinkage that tends to occur as a molded part cools.
• There are two methods to
apply shrinkage:
– Shrinkage by Scale
– Shrinkage by Dimension
• Formula options:
– 1+S
– 1/1–S
y
– Where S is the shrinkage
nl
ratio
O
• You can view the Shrink Info
for the applied shrinkage.
se
U
Figure 1 – Shrinkage Dialog Boxes
al
Understanding Shrinkage
rn
When a molded part is removed from a mold, it tends to shrink in size as it

cools down to room temperature. The amount of shrinkage that occurs in
te
a molding is highly dependent on part geometry, mold configuration and

processing conditions. Because the mold components are designed from
In
the reference model, you must consider the shrinkage of the material in the
reference model before you proceed with the rest of the mold design process.
This typically means that you proportionally increase dimensions of the
C
reference model so that the mold components created are of the pre-shrunk
molding size.
PT
You can apply shrinkage to the reference model in Mold mode. Depending
on the method of applying shrinkage and the method used to assemble the
reference model, the shrinkage feature may propagate to the design model.
r
Fo
Creo Parametric uses the following formulae to calculate shrinkage:

• 1+S — Uses a precalculated shrinkage factor that is based on the original
geometry of the reference model.
• 1/(1–S) — Enables you to specify a shrinkage factor that is based upon the
fina geometry of the reference model once shrinkage is applied.
In the above formulae, S is the shrinkage ratio specifie .
There are two different methods to apply shrinkage:
• Shrinkage by Dimension
• Shrinkage by Scale
Viewing Shrinkage Information
When shrinkage has been applied to a reference model, you can view the
information regarding the shrinkage by clicking the Analysis group drop-down

menu and selecting Shrinkage Information . An information window
appears, providing you with the following details:
• Model name — Specifie the name of the model that shrinkage was
applied to.
• Shrinkage method — Specifie whether the model is shrunk by scaling
or by dimension.
• Shrinkage formula — Specifie which formula was used to apply the
shrinkage to the model.
• Model Dimensions and Shrinkage Value — When shrinkage has been
applied by dimensions, these specify which dimensions the shrinkage was
applied to and the shrinkage value applied to each dimension.
y
• Shrink coordinate system — Specifie the coordinate system specifie
when shrinkage is applied by scaling.
nl
• Shrink factors — Specifie the shrink scaling factors used when shrinkage
O
is applied by scaling.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Applying Shrinkage by Scale
You can shrink part geometry by scaling it in relation to
coordinate system directions.
• You can apply shrinkage by scale
to all three directions uniformly.
– Isotropic
• You can apply different shrinkage
ratios to each of the three
coordinate system directions.
– X-Direction
y
– Y-Direction
nl
– Z-Direction
Figure 1 – Model Before
O
Shrinkage Applied
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage

Figure 2 – Isotropic Shrinkage Ratios Applied to Different
C
by Scale Applied Directions

PT
Applying Shrinkage by Scale

The Shrinkage by Scale method enables you to shrink the part geometry
by scaling it in relation to a coordinate system. You can specify different
r
shrinkage ratios for the X, Y, and Z-coordinates. If you apply shrinkage

Fo
in Mold mode, it applies only to the reference model and does not affect
the design model.
Shrinkage by scale is applied by creating a new shrinkage feature. When
you apply shrinkage in Mold mode, the shrinkage feature is created in the
reference model, not in the design model, unless the Same Model option was
used when assembling the reference model into the mold model.
To apply shrinkage by scale, you must specify the following items:
• Coordinate System – Specify the model coordinate system that the
shrinkage feature uses as a reference. The X, Y, and Z-directions of
the coordinate system determine the X, Y, and Z-directions used for the
shrinkage ratio.
• Formula – Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
• Shrink Ratio – Specifie the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.

The following options are available when applying shrinkage by scale:
• Isotropic – When enabled, sets the same shrinkage ratio for the X, Y, and
Z-directions. You can clear this check box to specify a different shrinkage
ratio for each of the three directions.
• Forward references – When enabled, the shrinkage does not create new
geometry but changes the existing geometry so that all existing references
continue to be part of the model. You can clear this check box to have
the system create new geometry for the part on which shrinkage is being
applied.
Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Scale

When applying shrinkage by scale in Mold mode, keep the following in mind:
y
nl
• A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage
ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with
O
the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a
negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
se
• It is never reflecte in the design model, unless the design model is the
reference model.
U
• If it is applied to the design model in Part mode, then the shrinkage feature
belongs to the design model, not to the reference model. Shrinkage is
accurately reflecte by the reference model geometry, but it cannot be
al
cleared in Mold mode.

rn
• It should be applied prior to the definitio of parting surfaces or volumes.

• It affects part geometry (surfaces and edges) and datum features (including
te
curves, axes, planes, and points).

In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Scale
Mold\Shrinkage_Scale SHRINKAGE_SCALE.ASM
Task 1: Apply shrinkage by scale to a reference model.
The shrinkage ratios specifie in this procedure are not

representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are
used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes,
due to applying shrinkage.
y
nl
Display types: .
O
2. In the model tree,
expand reference model
SHRINKAGE_SCALE.PRT.
3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select se
U
Edit .
al
4. Notice the three feature

dimensions.
rn
te
5. Select Shrink by scale from

the Shrinkage types drop-down
In
menu in the Modifier group.

C
PRT_CSYS_DEF.
PT
7. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog

box, select 1+S as the
Formula, if necessary.
r
• Verify that the Isotropic check

Fo
box is selected.
• Edit the Shrink Ratio to 0.5.
• Click Preview Feature .
8. Notice that the entire model
uniformly gets larger.

box, clear the Isotropic check
box.
• Edit the X Shrink Ratio to 0.25.
• Edit the Y Shrink Ratio to 0.25.
• Edit the Z Shrink Ratio to 0.75.
• Click OK .
10. Notice that the model has grown
larger in the Z-coordinate system
direction than in the other two
y
directions.
nl
11. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
.
O
Edit
12. Notice that even though
shrinkage was applied, the
original dimensions remain
unchanged. se
U
al
rn
te
13. Click the Analysis group

In
Shrinkage Information .
14. Notice the shrinkage information
C
in the information window.

PT
• Click Close.
15. Right-click Shrinkage id 4566

r
and select Edit Definition .

Fo

box, select 1/1-S as the
Formula.
• Click OK .
17. Notice that the resulting
geometry is even more distorted.
The shrinkage is based on
the fina geometry now that
shrinkage is applied.

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension
You can specify one shrinkage ratio for all model dimensions, or
specify unique ratios for individual model dimensions.
• Dimensions with shrinkage ratios
applied appear magenta in the
graphics window.
• Select individual feature
dimensions to add shrinkage
ratios to.
• Select a feature to add shrinkage
ratios to all of its dimensions.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Model Before
O
Shrinkage Applied
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage

Figure 2 – Shrinkage Ratio Applied Ratios Applied to Specifi
In
to All Dimensions Dimensions
Applying Shrinkage by Dimension

C
The Shrinkage by Dimension method enables you to set up one shrinkage

PT
ratio for all model dimensions, and specify ratios for individual dimensions.
To apply shrinkage by dimension, you must specify the following items:
• Formula – Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
r
Fo
• Dimensions – Specify which dimensions to add shrinkage to.

• Shrinkage Ratio – Specifie the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.
Within the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, a table displays the following
columns:
• Dimensions – Displays which dimensions have a shrinkage ratio applied.
The dimension symbol and original value are displayed in the cell.
• Ratio – Displays the shrinkage ratio for each dimension in the table.
• Final value – Displays the fina dimension value once the shrinkage ratio
has been applied.
You can specify a shrinkage ratio for All Dimensions in the model. The
shrinkage ratio is in the firs row of the Shrinkage Ratio table. In Figure 2, a
shrinkage ratio of 0.5 has been applied to all dimensions.
To add additional dimensions to the table, you can use the following methods:

• Insert Selected Dimensions – Displays the dimensions for a selected
feature, enabling you to select and apply the desired shrinkage ratio. In
Figure 3, the 3 hole diameter dimension has had a shrinkage ratio applied
to it.
• Insert All Dimensions From Feature – Enables you to select a
feature in the graphics window. All dimensions comprising that feature are
automatically added to the table. In Figure 3, all three dimensions of the
main extrude feature have had a shrinkage ratio applied.
• You can also click Add New Row and type the symbol for the
dimension. You can see what a given dimension's symbol is by clicking
Toggle Dimensions .
y
The following options are available when applying shrinkage by dimension:
nl
• Change Dimensions of Design Part – Determines whether the shrinkage
feature is placed in the design model. Depending on the method of
O
reference model creation, this option may be grayed out. For example, if
the reference model was created using the Same Model, this option does
se
nothing, as the feature is created in the design model regardless.
U
Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Dimension
When applying shrinkage by dimension, keep the following in mind:
al
• A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage

rn
ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with
the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a
te
negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
• If the part has had shrinkage applied, dimensions display in magenta when
In
viewed in the design model or a drawing, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.

• If the part has not had shrinkage applied, dimensions remain displayed in
C
black when viewed in the design model or a drawing.

• Shrinkage by dimension values is not cumulative. For example, if you
PT
specify 1.5 as the All Dimensions shrinkage ratio for a model with 10 as
the value of all its dimensions, and then specify a separate shrinkage
ratio of 2.0 for the length dimension, then the fina length is 20 (10*2.0),
r
not 30 [(10*1.5)*2.0]. Individual shrinkage values for dimensions always

Fo
supersede the overall model shrink value.

• The configuratio fil option, shrinkage_value_display, determines how
dimensions are displayed when shrinkage is applied to a model. The
possible values of this configuratio option are percent_shrink and
fina _value. For the procedure, the value for this configuratio option is
percent_shrink.
• By default, whenever a part has shrinkage information associated with it,
the nominal dimension values are displayed, followed by the shrinkage
value in parentheses. If you set the value of the configuratio fil option
shrinkage_value_display to percent_shrink, shrinkage is represented as
percentage of the nominal dimension. You can display the fina value of the
shrunken dimensions by changing the value of the configuratio fil option
shrinkage_value_display to fina _value.

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Dimension
Mold\Shrinkage_Dimension SHRINKAGE_DIM.ASM
Task 1: Apply shrinkage by dimension to a reference model.
The shrinkage ratios specifie in this procedure are not

representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are
used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes,
due to applying shrinkage.
y
nl
2. In the model tree,
O
expand reference model
SHRINKAGE_DIM.PRT.
3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
. se
U
Edit
4. Notice the three feature
al
dimensions.
rn
5. Select Shrink by dimension

te
from the Shrinkage types

drop-down menu in the Modifier
In
group.
6. In the Shrinkage By Dimension
dialog box, verify that the
C
Formula is 1+S .
PT
• Edit the ratio to 0.5 for All

Dimensions, and click OK .
r
7. Notice that the model gets

Fo
uniformly larger.
8. Click in the background to
de-select all geometry.
Extrude 1 and select Edit .
10. Notice that the dimensions are
magenta and display the percent
increase they have undergone.
11. Right-click Round 1 and select
Edit .

12. Click Shrink by dimension .
• Edit the ratio to -0.5 for All
Dimensions, and click OK .
• Right-click Round 1 and select
Edit .
y
15. Notice that the dimensions are
nl
magenta and display the percent
decrease they have undergone.
O
16. Click Shrink by dimension .
• Edit the ratio to 0.0 for All
Dimensions.
se
U
• Click Insert Selected
Dimensions and select
al
Hole 1.
• Select the 3 dimension.
rn
• Click Insert All Dimensions

te
From Feature .
• Select Extrude 1.
In
17. In the Shrinkage Ratio table, edit

the ratio for dimension d6 to 0.5.
C
• Edit the d1 ratio to 0.75.

PT

• Notice the fina values for each
r
of the dimensions in the table

Fo
and click OK .
• Right-click Hole 1 and select
Edit .
20. Notice the different individual
percentage shrinkage increases.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 6
y
Workpieces
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Once you have created the mold model, you can create and assemble
the workpiece. The workpiece represents the full volume of all the mold
components that are needed to create the completed mold model. You can
U
also apply style states to the workpiece to make them transparent within
the mold model.
al
In this module, you learn how to create and assemble workpieces in a mold
rn
model.
te
Objectives
In
• Explain the different display styles you can apply to components when
creating style states.
C
• Create a workpiece automatically.

PT
• Create a custom automatic workpiece.

• Create and assemble a workpiece manually.
• Reclassify mold model components.
r
Fo

Creating Display Styles
Use display styles to assign display settings to individual
components of an assembly.
• Model display settings are independent of the assembly.
• Display options include:
– Wireframe
– Hidden Line
– Shaded
– Transparent
y
• You can also blank, or hide, components individually.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 1 – Original Model Figure 2 – Viewing a Display Style

te
Creating Display Styles

In
The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four
following display options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded.
C
You can also assign display styles to individual components in an assembly

that can be used regardless of those overall session settings.
PT
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your
assembly.
r
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an

Fo
assembly:
• Wireframe – Shows front and back lines equally.
• Hidden Line – Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.
• No Hidden – Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.
• Shaded – Shows the model as a shaded solid.
• Transparent – Shows the model as a transparent solid.
• Blank – Does not show the model.
You can apply existing display styles to sub-assemblies using the By Display
tab. When you select a sub-assembly from the model tree, the available
display styles for that sub-assembly display in the By Display tab, enabling
you to specify the desired one.
You can also modify component display styles without using the view
manager. You can select desired models in the graphics window, model tree,

or search tool and click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style to assign a display style to the selected models.
You can store these temporary edits with a new display style or update them
to an existing one.
After you defin the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.
Uses of Display Styles

You use display styles to do the following:
• Increase system performance by either blanking components from display
or limiting the number of components being calculated for hidden line
display.
y
• Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common
nl
situations where it is helpful to change the display of components within
an assembly.
O
You cannot use display styles in drawing view.
Blanked components are not removed from session memory; they
se
are only removed from display. For this reason, you cannot use
display styles to reduce the amount of memory required to open
U
and work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory using
simplifie reps.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles
View\Display-Style_View-Manager GEARBOX_S2.ASM
Task 1: Create a new display style using the view manager.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Select the Style tab from the view manager.
y
4. Click New.
nl
O
default name Style0001.
• Notice this opens the EDIT
se
dialog box on the Blank tab.
6. In the model tree, select
GEARBOX_REAR_S2.PRT.
U
7. Click Preview.
al
rn
8. In the model tree, select the four

BOLT_5-18.PRT models.
te
• Notice that the Blank

component status is shown in
In
the Edit column of the model

tree.
C
9. Click Preview.
PT
10. In the EDIT dialog box, select

the Show tab and select
r
Transparent.
Fo
11. In the model tree, expand the

DRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM
node and then select
CHUCK_S2.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.
12. Click Preview.
13. Click OK.

Task 2: Copy and redefin to create a new display style.
1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.
3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.
4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.
CHUCK_S2.PRT and
PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to
also be blanked.
y
6. Click Preview.
nl
7. From the In Graphics toolbar,
O
select Hidden Line from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
8. Click OK.
se
U
Task 3: Use the model tree to edit a display style.
al
1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
rn
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.

3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.
te
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display

In
Style types drop-down menu.

5. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
C
6. In the Model Tree Columns

PT
dialog box, select Display

Styles from the Type drop-down
list.
r
7. In the Display Style list, select

Fo
STYLE0003 and click Add

Column to add the column to
the model tree.
8. Click OK.
9. In the STYLE0003 column of
the model tree, click to the right
of GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT
and select Blank from the
drop-down list.
10. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_
S2.PRT, select Undo from the
drop-down list.

11. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column
and OK.
Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you
with the option to preview or reset any edits that you make.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating a Workpiece Automatically
The workpiece is a model that represents the full volume of all
the mold components that are needed to create the final mold
model.
• The workpiece displays
transparent green in the graphics
window.
• The automatic workpiece accuracy
is automatically matched to the
reference model.
y
• The workpiece creates multiple
nl
shapes:
– Standard Rectangular Figure 1 – Viewing the Workpiece
O
in the Model Tree
– Standard Round
– Custom
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Standard Rectangular Figure 3 – Standard Round

C
Workpiece Workpiece
PT
Creating a Workpiece Automatically

Once you assemble the reference model into the mold model, you typically
r
create and assemble the workpiece next. The workpiece is a model that
Fo
represents the full volume of all the mold components (cavity, core, and
inserts) that are needed to create the fina mold model. The workpiece icon
that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part
model and the reference model, which is shown in Figure 1. The workpiece
displays transparent green in the graphics window.
To automatically create a workpiece, select Automatic Workpiece from

the Workpiece types drop-down menu. The workpiece is automatically
assembled to the specifie Origin coordinate system using the Coincident
assembly constraint, and the accuracy is automatically set to match that
of the reference model.
To create an automatic workpiece, you must specify the following items:
• Mold Origin – The Mold Origin is a mold model coordinate system from
which directions are determined for workpiece creation.

• Shape – The shape determines the shape of the workpiece. The system
creates a workpiece with the minimum dimensions that the reference model
fit in, within the specifie shape. The following options are available:
– Standard Rectangular – This creates a rectangular workpiece using
Create Rectangular Workpiece , which is shown in Figure 2.
– Standard Round – This creates a round-shaped workpiece using Create
Round Workpiece , which is shown in Figure 3.
– Custom – Custom creates a custom-shaped workpiece using Create
Custom Workpiece .
• Units – This specifie the system of units for the workpiece. You can select
inches or millimeters.
y
• Offsets – This enables you to specify the offset values to add to the
nl
dimensions of the workpiece, based on the mold origin. The offsets depend
on the shape of the workpiece that you have selected. You can specify
O
each offset individually, or specify all offsets uniformly. The following offset
se
– X-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative X-direction.
This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and
U
some custom shapes.
– Y-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative Y-direction.
al
This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and
some custom shapes.
rn
– Z-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative Z-direction.

– Radial – Radial adds material in the positive radial direction.
te
– Uniform Offsets – This adds material in the positive and negative X-, Y-,
and Z-directions, and Radial, where applicable.
In
• Overall Dimensions – The overall dimensions get updated when you specify
offset values. However, you can also specify the overall dimensions, and
C
the offset values get updated automatically. You can manually specify
PT
the X and Y dimensions for rectangular and custom workpieces, and the
Diameter for rounded workpieces, to customize the workpiece size. You
can manually specify the Z Cavity and Z Core dimensions for all workpieces
to customize the size.
r
Fo
• Translate Workpiece – This enables you to specify the translation values

for the X- and Y-directions to position the workpiece around the reference
model.
You can modify the default Workpiece Name. The Workpiece Name is the
name of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree. By
default, its name is of the format <MOLD-MODEL-NAME>_WRK, which is
shown in Figure 1.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Workpiece Automatically
Mold\Workpiece_Auto AUTO-WRKPIECE_RECT.ASM
Task 1: Create a rectangular workpiece in a mold model.

from the Workpiece
y
nl
group.
O
MOLD_DEF_CSYS from the
model tree.
dialog box, notice the name of se
U
the workpiece.
al
dialog box, click Create

rn
Rectangular Workpiece
if necessary.
te
• Verify that the Units are in mm.

• Notice that there are no Offsets
In
specifie .
• Notice the Overall X, Y, and Z
C
dimensions.
PT
• Click Preview.
6. Notice that the workpiece just
barely covers the reference
r
model.
Fo

dialog box, edit the Uniform
Offsets value to 30.
• Notice that the X, Y, and Z
direction +/- offsets all become
30.
• Notice that the Overall
dimensions' values have also
updated automatically.
• Click Preview.

dialog box, type 40 for the - and
+ offsets in the Y direction.
• Click Preview.

dialog box, edit the Overall X
Dimension to 340.
• Edit the Overall Y Dimension
y
to 160.
nl
• Notice that the Offset values
have updated.
O
• Click OK.
Task 2:
se
Create a round workpiece in a mold model.
U
AUTO-WRKPIECE_ROUND.
al
ASM.
rn

from the Workpiece types
te

MOLD_DEF_CSYS.
In

dialog box, click Create Round
C
Workpiece .
PT
• Edit the Radial Offset to 5.

• Edit the +Z Cavity to 6.
• Edit the -Z Core to 6.
r
• Click Preview.
Fo

dialog box, drag the Translate
Workpiece X direction slider to
the right.
• Drag the Translate Workpiece
Y direction slider to the left and
click Preview.
dialog box, edit the X and Y
Translate Workpiece Directions
to 0 and click OK.

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece
A custom automatic workpiece enables you to add flanges to
the top and bottom of the workpiece and rounds or chamfers to
the vertical edges.
• The process is the same as
creating a rectangular or round
workpiece.
• The default custom shape
for a custom workpiece is
BLOCK_XY_FLANGES.
• Many other shapes are available.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – BLOCK_XY_FLANGES
Custom Workpiece
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – CHAMF_CHAMF_XY_ Figure 3 – BAR_TOP_FLANGE

C
BOT_FLANGE Custom Workpiece Custom Workpiece

PT
Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece

In addition to a Standard Rectangular and Standard Round automatic
r
workpiece, you can also create a custom workpiece. A custom automatic

Fo
workpiece enables you to add flange to the top and bottom of the workpiece.
It also enables you to add rounds or chamfers to the vertical workpiece edges.
The process is the same as creating a rectangular or round workpiece.
To create a custom automatic workpiece, you can use the Create Custom
Workpiece option in the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, and then
select the desired shape in the drop-down list below it. The default shape
for a custom workpiece is BLOCK_XY_FLANGES, as shown in Figure 1.
However, the following shapes are also available:
• BLOCK_00_FLANGES
• BLOCK_00_BOT_FLANGE
• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_FLANGES
• CHAMF_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
• BLOCK_ROUND

• BLOCK_ROUND_00_TOP_FLANGE
• BAR_FLANGES
• BAR_BOT_FLANGE
• BLOCK_00_TOP_FLANGE
• BLOCK_CHAMF
• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_TOP_FLANGE
• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
• BLOCK_ROUND_00_FLANGES
• BLOCK_ROUND_00_BOT_FLANGE
• BAR_TOP_FLANGE
y
The 00 value in the shapes above represent the X, Y, or XY
nl
direction.
O
You can use the offsets available for the rectangular and round automatic
workpiece for a custom workpiece.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually
You can create a part model inside or outside of Mold mode and
designate it as the workpiece when assembling it into the mold
model.
• Use conventional part modeling

techniques.
• Assemble workpiece using
conventional assembly
constraints.
y
• The accuracy of a manually
created workpiece must be
nl
matched to the reference model.
O
Figure 1 – Part Model
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Creating a Workpiece Figure 3 – Part Model Assembled

within the Mold Model as Workpiece
C
PT
Creating a Workpiece Manually

You can create a workpiece manually using either of the following methods:
r
• Create the workpiece within the mold model by selecting Create

Fo
Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the

Reference Model & Workpiece group. The Component Create dialog box
appears, and you must provide the name of the workpiece component as it
displays in the model tree.
• Create the workpiece outside the mold model as a conventional part model.
When the part model is needed as the workpiece in the mold model, you
can assemble it as a component into the mold model and designate it
as the workpiece.
When creating the workpiece manually, you can use any of the conventional
part modeling feature techniques available when creating a regular part
model. For example, you can use Extrude features, Revolve features, Hole
features, Sweep features, and Blend features.

Assembling a Manually Created Workpiece
If the workpiece is created in the mold model, it is already designated as
the workpiece upon its creation. It must then be properly assembled into
the mold model.
If you create a part model outside of the mold and want to use it as the
workpiece in a mold model, you must assemble it into the mold model and
designate it as the workpiece. You can do this by selecting Assemble
Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference
Model & Workpiece group.
You can assemble the workpiece into the mold model using any of the
available assembly constraints including Default , Coincident ,
y
nl
Distance , Angle Offset , Parallel , and Normal .
O
Considerations When Creating and Assembling a Workpiece
Manually
se
Keep the following in mind when creating and assembling a workpiece
manually:
U
• If you manually create a workpiece and assemble it into the mold model,
you need to match the workpiece accuracy to that of the reference model.
al
• Keep the location of where the workpiece is split in mind. You can create a
rn
datum plane or coordinate system at this location to aid in the assembly

process later.
te
Best Practices
In
It is a best practice to create an automatic workpiece whenever possible.

When an automatic workpiece is created, Creo Parametric automatically sets
C
the accuracy of the workpiece model to that of the reference model. If a

PT
manual workpiece is created and assembled into the mold model, you must
manually modify the workpiece accuracy so that it matches the reference
model.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating and Assembling a Workpiece
Manually
Mold\Workpiece_Manual MANUAL_WRK.PRT
Task 1: Assemble a workpiece created outside the mold model.

Display types: .
y
2. Notice the part model and its
nl
datum planes.
The accuracy has already
O
been set to that of the
reference model.
3. Click Close
Access toolbar.
from the Quick
se
U
al
CAP.ASM.
rn
5. Select Assemble Workpiece

from the Workpiece
te

In
group.
6. In the Open dialog
C
box, double-click
MANUAL_WRK.PRT.
PT
7. In the dashboard, select

Default from the constraint
r
drop-down list.
Fo
• Click Complete Component

.
8. Notice the component is now in
the workpiece color.
9. Notice the workpiece symbol in
the model tree.
10. Click Close .

Task 2: Create and assemble a workpiece in the mold model.
1. Click Open and double-click CAP_ROUND.ASM.

2. Select Create Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down
menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
3. In the Create Component dialog
box, type ROUND_WRK as the
Name and click OK.
4. In the Creation Options dialog
box, select Copy from existing
y
if necessary and click Browse.
nl
• Select Working Directory
O
and double-click
MMNS_PART_SOLID.PRT.
se
• Click OK.
5. In the dashboard, select
U
Default from the constraint
drop-down list and click
al
Complete Component .
rn

ROUND_WRK.PRT and select
te
Activate .
In
7. Pre-highlight datum plane TOP

and then select it.
C
8. Click Extrude from the

Shapes group.
PT
9. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
r
Fo
.
10. Click Center and Point
from the Circle types drop-down
menu in the Sketching group and
sketch a circle, using the origin
as the circle center.
11. Middle-click and edit the
diameter to 80.
12. Click OK .

13. Edit the depth to 45.
Options tab.
• Select Blind as the Side 2
depth and edit the depth to 15.
• Click Complete Feature .
15. Press CTRL+A to activate the
top level assembly.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model
Components
Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which
component is used as the workpiece.
• Each component type can be

reclassifie to any other type:
– Workpiece
– Mold Base Component
y
– Mold Component
nl
• You cannot reclassify the reference
model.
O
se
Figure 1 – Mold Model Before
U
Reclassificatio
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Mold Base Component Figure 3 – Mold Model After

Reclassifie to a Workpiece Reclassificatio
r
Fo
Reclassifying Mold Model Components

You can switch the classificatio of components within the mold model.
Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which component
is used as the workpiece. Each of the following component types can be
reclassifie to any of the other types:
• Workpiece — The mold model uses the selected component as a
workpiece. In Figure 2, the rectangular mold base component has been
reclassifie as a workpiece.
• Mold Base Component — The mold model uses the selected component
as a mold base component. In Figure 3, the round workpiece has been
reclassifie as a mold base component.
• Mold Component — The mold model uses the selected component as
a mold component.

The following are some points to keep in mind when reclassifying mold model
components:
• You cannot reclassify the reference model.
• You cannot reclassify a different model to become a reference model.
• The mold model can contain multiple workpieces. In Figure 2, a mold base
component has been reclassifie as a workpiece, causing there to be two
workpieces in the mold model.
Removing Mold Model Components

You can remove components from the mold model in any of the following
ways:
y
nl
• Select the component, right-click, and select Delete .
• Select the component, and press DELETE.
O
• Select the component and select Delete from the Delete types
drop-down menu in the Operation group.
The Undo and Redo se

operations are not available if you
U
remove components from the mold model.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model
Components
Mold\Reclassify RECLASSIFY.ASM
Task 1: Reclassify mold model components.

2. In the model tree, click
ROUND_WRK.PRT and notice
y
the round workpiece in the mold
nl
model.
O
3. Notice also the rectangular mold
base component.
se
U
al
4. Click Classify from the

rn
Modifier group.
5. Select MANUAL_WRK.PRT and
te
click OK from the Select dialog

box.
In
6. Click Workpiece > Done from

the menu manager.
C
7. Notice that there are now two

workpieces in the mold model.
PT
8. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT
r
and middle-click to accept the

Fo
selection.
9. Click Mld Base Cmp > Done
from the menu manager.
box.
11. Notice that there is now only one
workpiece in the mold model.

Task 2: Remove a mold model component.
1. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT,
right-click, and select Delete .
2. Click OK from the Delete dialog
box.
3. Notice the mold base component
is removed from the mold model.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7
y
Mold Volume Creation
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Once the reference model and workpiece have been assembled into the mold
model you must create mold volumes within the mold model. Mold volumes
are surfaces that locate a closed volume of space in the workpiece, and are
U
ultimately used to create the fina mold core, cavity, and slider components.
al
In this module, you learn which mold volumes are in a mold model and how
to create them.
rn
Objectives
te

In
• Understand and explain some of the basic surfacing terms.

• Understand what mold volumes are and explain their characteristics.
C
• Sketch mold volumes.

• Create sliders using boundary quilts.
PT
• Sketch sliders.
• Create a reference part cutout.
r
• Sketch lifter and insert mold volumes.

Fo
• Replace surfaces and trim to geometry.

Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are important to understand because
they are used throughout this course.
• Surfaces
– Quilt
– Surface Patch
– Solid Surface
– Datum Planes
• Edges
y
– Surface edge Figure 1 – Viewing a Surface
nl
♦ One-sided
♦ Two-sided
O
– Solid edge
se
Figure 2 – Surface Quilt
U
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 3 – Solid Surface

and Edge Figure 4 – Surface Edge
PT
Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are used throughout this course. Therefore, they
r
are important to understand.

Fo
• Surface – Surfaces are infinitel thin, non-solid features used to aid in the
design of highly complex and irregular shapes. Notice that surfaces are
shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges when viewed in
wireframe display, as in Figure 1.
– Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
– Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges, since they border two surface
patches.
In Creo Parametric, the term surface can be used for any of the following:
• Quilts – A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces.
A quilt represents a patchwork of connected surfaces. A multi-surface
quilt contains information describing the geometry of all the surfaces
that compose it, and information on how these surfaces are joined or
intersected, such as the models shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

• Surface Patch – If you create a surface feature, which is made of several
segments, the surface is created with multiple patches, as in Figure 1.
• Solid Surfaces – A face of a solid feature, such as the solid model shown
in Figure 3.
• Datum Planes – A planar datum feature that extends infinitel but is
represented by a rectangular border.
• Edge – An edge is the boundary of a solid, as in Figure 3 or a surface, as in
Figure 4. Surface edges can be one-sided or two-sided depending on the
presence of adjacent surface geometry.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Mold Volumes
A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume
of space within the workpiece.
• Mold volumes:
– Have no solid material.
– Are ultimately used to create
solid mold components.
– Are assembly-level features.
• As a best practice you should
rename mold volumes.
y
• You can apply finishin features
nl
such as rounds and drafts.
Figure 1 – Model Tree of
O
Mold Model
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Mold Volumes Shaded Figure 3 – Mold Volumes No Hidden

C
Understanding Mold Volumes

PT
A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume of space

within the workpiece. Because the mold volume is comprised of surfaces,
it has no solid material. Creating mold volumes is an intermediate step to
r
creating the fina extracted mold components. Mold volumes are ultimately
Fo
used to create the fina solid extracted mold components. Figure 2 shows
three different mold volumes. Because the mold volumes are surfaces, they
appear magenta when the model display is set to something other than
shading, as shown in Figure 3.
The following is some general information regarding mold volume creation:
• A mold volume can add or remove material.
• A mold volume is created as an assembly level protrusion or cut within
the mold model.
• You can sketch mold volumes.
• A mold volume can be trimmed or split using other surfaces.
• Mold volume creation is an iterative process. You can create mold volumes
at any time after the workpiece is assembled but before the fina solid mold
components are extracted.

A mold volume displays in the model tree with a different icon than that of the
reference model and workpiece, as shown in Figure 1.
Because mold volumes are created within the workpiece, it is

beneficia to create a style state that sets the workpiece to wireframe
when creating mold volumes. This enables you to more clearly see
inside the workpiece, yet it still makes the workpiece and its surfaces
available if they need to be selected as references. The workpiece
in the figure is set to wireframe.
Renaming Mold Volumes

When you create a mold volume, it is a best practice to rename it to
y
something that helps you recognize it within the model tree. To rename a
nl
mold volume, you can click Properties from the Controls group after
starting the mold volume creation tool. You can also right-click in the graphics
O
window and select Properties. This causes the Properties dialog box to
appear, which enables you to edit the mold volume name. In Figure 1, notice
se
that the mold volumes have been renamed.
Applying Finishing Features

U
You can add draft and round features to a mold volume in the same manner
al
in which you add to any other solid part. This enables you to customize the
mold volume. It is used to create the solid mold component.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Sketching Mold Volumes
You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape.
• Sketch-based feature tools
include:
– Extrude
– Revolve
– Sweep
– Blend
– Swept Blend
Figure 1 – Sketching a Mold Volume
y
– Use Quilt
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Mold Model with No Figure 3 – Mold Model with

Mold Volumes Mold Volume
te
Sketching Mold Volumes

In
You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape. Consider the following
guidelines when sketching mold volumes:
C
• The mold volume is a set of surfaces.

PT
• You can use most sketch-based features within Mold mode to create a
mold volume. Feature tools you can use include:
– Extrude — Extrudes a sketch section to a specifie depth in the
r
direction normal to the sketching plane.

Fo
– Revolve — Revolves a sketched section by a specifi angle around

an axis of rotation.
– Sweep — Sweeps a sketched section along a specifi trajectory.
Create constant section sweeps or variable section sweeps.
– Blend tool — Creates a straight or smooth blended volume by
connecting several sketched sections.
– Swept Blend — Sweeps a blend section along a specifie trajectory.
– Use Quilt — Creates a volume by referencing a surface or quilt.
• Depending on the tool used and the desired mold volume, it can be
beneficia to use the workpiece surfaces as sketching planes for the mold
volumes.
• The sketch must be closed.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Mold Volumes
Mold\Volume_Sketch SKETCH-VOLUME.ASM
Task 1: Sketch a mold volume in a mold model.

Display types:
2. From the model tree, select
SKETCH-VOLUME_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe.
U
6. Select Mold Volume from the
al

rn
Mold Volume group.

te
7. Click Properties from the

Controls group.
In
8. In the Properties dialog box, edit

the Name to PLUG_VOL and
press ENTER.
C
PT
9. Click Revolve from the

Shapes group.
10. Right-click and select Define
r
Internal Sketch.
Fo

MOLD_RIGHT from the model
tree as the Sketch Plane.
12. Select Top from the Orientation
drop-down list and click Sketch.

Sketcher Display types: .
select Hidden Line from the
menu.
16. Click References from the
Setup group.
17. Zoom in and select the top
workpiece surface, datum axis
y
A_1, the bottom of the plug, and
nl
the angled edge.
18. Click Close from the References
O
dialog box.
se
19. Click Centerline from the
Datum group.
U
20. Sketch a vertical centerline on
the axis reference.
al
21. Click Line Chain from the

rn
Sketching group and sketch the

fiv lines shown.
te
22. Click OK .
In
23. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

Standard Orientation.
C

from the dashboard.
PT

group.
r
26. De-select all geometry.

Fo
27. Select No Hidden from the

menu and disable Axis Display
.
28. Notice that the sketched mold
volume is a surface.

29. Select Shading from the
menu.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts
The system can calculate undercut areas in the reference model
and create boundary quilts to be used for automatic slider
creation.
• A slider is a special type of mold
volume.
• Boundary quilts are created in
undercut areas.
• Slider mold volume is created from
the boundary quilt.
y
• Slider mold volume can be
nl
projected to a specifie plane.
O
Figure 1 – Meshing a Boundary
se Quilt
U
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 3 – Slider Mold Volume

PT
Figure 2 – Slider Mold Volume Projected to Workpiece Surface
What is a Slider?
r
A slider is a mold component that helps account for undercuts in the

Fo
reference model geometry. Undercuts are features in the reference model

that would prevent a conventional core-and-cavity mold from opening after
the molded part has solidifie . Sliders “slide” in from the sides to account for
these undercuts to keep the mold from locking when opening and closing, or
destroying the part. The action of these sliders is called side action.
Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts
In Creo Parametric, a slider is a special type of mold volume that can be
used to ultimately create the slider mold component. One of the ways you
can create sliders in Creo Parametric is by using boundary quilts. To create a
slider mold volume using boundary quilts, you must select Mold Volume
from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group and then click Slider from the Volume Tools group. This
launches the Slider Volume dialog box.

The Slider Volume dialog box displays the reference part found in the mold
model. If the mold model contains more than one reference model, you must
specify which one is to be used for the calculation.
You can also specify the pull direction. The system utilizes the mold model's
pull direction as the default Pull Direction, but you can specify a different pull
direction by selecting any of the following references:
• Plane — Makes the pull direction perpendicular to the specifie plane.
• Curve, Edge, or Axis — Makes the pull direction follow the selected curve,
edge, or axis.
• Coordinate System — Makes the pull direction follow the specifie axis
of the selected coordinate system.
y
Once the pull direction has been defined you can click Calculate Undercut
nl
Boundaries from the Slider Volume dialog box. This causes the system
to perform a geometry check for undercut areas in the reference model. The
O
system performs the check by shining a light on the reference model in the
pull direction. The areas where light does not reach are the undercuts, which
se
are also known as black volumes. These areas would cause the mold to lock
on opening or closing. Therefore, a slider is required in these areas.
U
The system creates boundary quilts in the areas where the undercuts occur
and displays them in the Exclude column of the Slider Volume dialog box.
al
You can select each boundary quilt and perform the following operations
on each quilt:
rn
• Mesh — Meshes the boundary surface in the graphics window. In Figure 1,

te
the boundary surface is meshed.

• Shade — Shades only the boundary surface in the graphics window,
In
temporarily hiding all other geometry.

You can then add each quilt that you want to become a slider mold volume to
C
the Include column of the Slider Volume dialog box. The system automatically
extrudes the slider mold volume based on the boundary quilt. A completed
PT
slider mold volume is shown in Figure 2.
Specifying the Projection Plane

r
Fo
Optionally, you can specify a projection plane for each slider mold volume.
The system extends the extruded slider volume up to the specifie projection
plane, in the direction normal to the plane. In Figure 3, the right surface of the
workpiece was specifie as the projection plane. The resulting slider mold
volume is projected up to this surface.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts
Mold\Slider_Boundary SLIDER-CALC.ASM
Task 1: Create a slider mold volume using boundary quilts in a mold

model.

SLIDER-CALC_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab. se
U
6. Click Mold Volume from the
al
Parting Surface & Mold Volume

group.
rn

te
Controls group.
8. In the Properties dialog box, edit
In
the Name to CORNER_SLIDER

and press ENTER.
C
9. Click Slider from the Volume

PT
Tools group.
10. In the Slider Volume dialog
box, click Calculate Undercut
r
Boundaries .
Fo
• Notice that one undercut area

was found in the reference
model.

select Quilt 1 and click Mesh
Selected Boundary Surfaces
.
12. Notice that the quilt is meshed in
the graphics window.
y
nl
click Shade Selected Boundary
Surfaces .
O
14. Click OK from the Shade Info
dialog box.
se
U
al
15. In the Slider Volume dialog

rn
box, click Include Boundary

Surfaces to include the quilt.
te
• Click Apply Changes .

In

group.
C
17. Notice the slider mold volume

that was created.
PT
18. With the slider mold volume still

r
selected, right-click and select

Fo
Edit Definition .
click Select Projection Plane
.
20. Select the right surface of the
workpiece.

the Slider Volume dialog box.
22. Notice that the slider mold
volume has extruded out to the
selected surface.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes
You can sketch slider mold volumes as an alternative to
calculating undercut boundaries.
• Reasons to sketch slider mold
volumes:
– Shape
– Size
– Result
• Sketching guidelines:
y
– Calculate undercut boundaries
nl
for reference.
– Ensure your sketched slider
Figure 1 – Undesired Slider Result
O
accounts for the entire undercut
geometry.
se
– The sketch must be closed. U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Sketched Slider

Mold Volumes Figure 3 – Slider Volume too Small
C
Sketching Slider Mold Volumes

PT
You can also sketch slider mold volumes. The following are reasons to
sketch slider mold volumes:
r
• Shape – When calculated undercut boundaries are used, the resulting

Fo
slider mold volume takes on the shape of the undercut geometry. If the
shape is not desired for manufacturing, or it cannot be manufactured, a
slider mold volume can be sketched to account for the undercut geometry.
In Figure 1, the shape created by calculating undercut boundaries is not as
conducive to manufacturing as the sketched slider mold volume in Figure 2.
• Size – Since the slider mold volume created by calculating undercut
boundaries takes on the shape of the undercut, the slider mold volume
may be too small for manufacturing, as shown in Figure 3. Consequently,
you can sketch a larger slider mold volume that accounts for the undercut,
as shown in Figure 2.
• Result – Depending on the reference model geometry, sometimes the
slider mold volume obtained by calculating undercut boundaries cannot be
created, or the slider mold volume does not entirely account for undercut
geometry. In Figure 1, the slider does not properly account for the round
feature, and thus a sketched mold volume was created in Figure 2.

Guidelines for Sketching Sliders
When creating slider mold volumes using sketch-based features, consider
the following guidelines:
• You can still initially calculate the undercut boundaries for the reference
model even when you are sketching the slider mold volumes. The analysis
helps you determine the locations in the mold model where sliders will
be required and helps ensure that you have accounted for all undercut
geometry.
• Ensure that the sketch you create accounts for the entire undercut
geometry. That is, make sure that the entire undercut geometry is contained
within the resulting sketched slider mold volume. It can be beneficia to
utilize the sides of the undercut geometry as sketching references.
y
• Because the slider is simply a special type of mold volume, you can use
nl
any sketch-based feature that is available for sketching the conventional
mold volume on the slider mold volume.
O
• Because the slider is a mold volume, the sketch must be closed.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Sketching Slider Mold Volumes
Mold\Slider_Sketch SLIDER-SKETCH.ASM
Task 1: Sketch a slider mold volume in a mold model.

Display types:
SLIDER-SKETCH_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe
5. The left slider volume, created by
U
calculating undercut boundaries,
is too small to be manufactured,
al
so you must sketch a different

slider mold volume.
rn

te
7. From the model tree, select the

LEFT_SLIDER_VOL, right-click,
In
and select Suppress .

• Click OK and de-select all
C
geometry.
PT
8. Click Mold Volume from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume
group.
r
9. Right-click and select Properties.

Fo
• Type LOWER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.

Shapes group.
Internal Sketch.
12. Select the front workpiece
surface as the Sketch Plane.
13. Select Bottom from the
Orientation drop-down list and
click Sketch.

.
Setup group.
17. Select datum planes MOLD_
RIGHT, MAIN_PARTING_PLN,
and the left and right surfaces of
y
the tab, zooming in if necessary.
nl
dialog box.
O
19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension
the following sketch.
20. Click OK . se
U
al
rn
21. Spin the model slightly and click

Change Depth Direction .
te

right-click the depth handle
In
and select To Selected.

23. Right-click to query and select
C
the inner reference model

surface.
r PT
Fo

from the dashboard.
group.

Task 2: Sketch a second slider mold volume.
1. Spin the model if necessary

and zoom in on the right slider
volume.
2. The right slider volume,
created by calculating undercut
boundaries, has not completely
accounted for the undercut
created by the round.
3. Select the RIGHT_SLIDER_
y
VOL, right-click, and select
nl
Suppress .
• Click OK and de-select all
O
geometry.
4. Click Mold Volume

5. Click Properties
.
se
from the Controls group.
U
• Type UPPER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.
al
6. Click Extrude .
rn

Internal Sketch.
te
8. Select the right workpiece

surface as the Sketch Plane.
In
9. Select Bottom from the

Orientation drop-down list and
C
click Sketch.
r PT
Fo

10. Click Sketch View .
11. Click References .
12. Select datum planes
MOLD_FRONT and
MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
references.
dialog box.
14. Select Center Rectangle
y
from the Rectangle types
drop-down menu and sketch,
nl
constrain, and dimension the
following sketch.
O
15. Click OK .
16. Spin the model slightly and click
. se
U
Change Depth Direction
al
right-click the depth handle

and select To Selected.
rn
18. Right-click to query and select

the inner reference model
te
surface.
In

from the dashboard.
C

PT
group.
r
Fo

Creating a Reference Part Cutout
A reference part cutout enables you to remove any overlapping
reference model geometry from the mold volume.
• The reference model volume
is subtracted from the mold
volume.
• The resulting mold volume
geometry matches the mating
reference model geometry.
• It helps you to verify that you
have created the desired mold
y
volume.
nl
• This is not a required step.
O
Figure 1 – Reference Model
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 3 – Reference Part

Figure 2 – Mold Volume Created Cutout Created
C
Creating a Reference Part Cutout

PT
You can create a reference part cutout on a mold volume by selecting

Reference Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group. A reference part cutout enables you to
r
Fo
remove any overlapping reference model geometry from the mold volume.
The volume of the reference model is subtracted from the mold volume.
This is a very useful feature because the mold volume will then match the
reference model geometry. A reference part cutout enables you to create a
mold volume that completely encompasses the desired area of the reference
model and then create a reference part cutout feature.
Creating a reference part cutout is not a requirement when creating mold
volumes. The reference model geometry is automatically cut out of the mold
volumes when the volumes are split (this happens later in the process).
Creating a reference part cutout is a great method to determine if the
reference geometry can successfully be cut out during the split process. It
can also help you visualize whether or not you have created a mold volume
that captures the desired reference model geometry.
The reference part cutout option is only available if you are creating a volume
or if you are redefinin the volume. The resulting reference part cutout feature

displays in the model tree as a feature called Refpart Cutout id. However, the
mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model
tree as shown in Figure 4:
Figure 4 – Reference Part Cutout in Model Tree
Reference Part Cutout Tips
y
Consider the following tips when creating a reference part cutout for a mold
nl
volume:
• Without creating additional modification to the volume after the reference
O
part cutout, the system makes the reference part cutout option unavailable.
Therefore, you cannot cut out a volume twice.
se
• When more than one reference part is present, the system prompts you to
select one.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating a Reference Part Cutout
Mold\Reference-Part_Cutout REFPART-CUTOUT.ASM
Task 1: Create reference part cutouts in mold volumes in a mold model.

2. Select REFPART-CUTOUT_
WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
6. Notice the rectangular hole in the se
U
bottom surface.
al
7. In the model tree, right-click mold

volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL
rn
and select Unhide .

te
8. Notice that the mold volume

completely consumes the
In
rectangular cut, but it also

occupies volume in the reference
model.
C
9. Notice that the surface of the

PT
mold volume is fla .

10. Select mold volume
UPPER_SLIDER_VOL,
r
right-click, and select Redefine

Fo
Mold Volume.
11. Select Reference Part Cutout
from the Trim To Geometry
Volume Tools group.
group.
13. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature
in the model tree.

14. Select reference model
REFPART-CUTOUT_REF.PRT,
right-click, and select Hide .
volume has been subtracted
from the mold volume.
16. Right-click REFPART-CUTOUT_
REF.PRT and select Unhide .
17. Pan the model to the
right to inspect the
y
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 mold
nl
volume.
18. Again, notice that the mold
O
volume completely consumes
the tab and also occupies volume
se
in the reference model.
19. Also notice that the surface of
U
the mold volume is fla .
al
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 and
select Redefine Mold Volume.
rn
21. Click Reference Part Cutout

te
.
22. Click OK .
In

in the model tree.
C

PT
volume has been subtracted

from the mold volume.
r
Fo

25. Pan the model to
the left to inspect
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1.
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1 and
27. Click Reference Part Cutout
.
28. Click OK .
y
in the model tree.
nl
30. Spin the model and notice that
the reference model volume has
O
been subtracted from the mold
volume.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes
A lifter is another mold component that helps account for
undercuts of the inside of the reference model geometry.
• Lifters usually move at an

angle.
• Lifters are usually long and
narrow.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing the Undercut
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Lifter Created to Account

for Undercut
C
PT
Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes

A lifter is another mold component that helps account for undercuts of the
inside of the reference model geometry. Because mold components are
r
ultimately created from mold volumes, you can use sketch-based features
Fo
to create lifter mold volumes in the mold model.

A lifter is usually attached to the moving side of the mold. It moves at an
angle to free the plastic that comprises the undercut inside the model. Due to
their function, lifters are normally long and narrow.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes
Mold\Volume_Lifter LIFTER.ASM
Task 1: Sketch lifter mold volumes in a mold model.

Display types: .
2. Select LIFTER_WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
se
Wireframe.
U
6. Notice the undercut created by
the tab.
al
7. Select Mold Volume from the

rn

Mold Volume group.
te

In
Controls group.
9. Edit the mold volume name
C
to LIFTER_VOL1 and press

ENTER.
PT

MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch
Plane.
r
Fo

Shapes group.
13. Select Hidden Line from the
menu.

.
Setup group and select the
bottom of the workpiece and the
tab vertex as references.
• Click Close.
y
nl
O
16. Click Centerline and sketch a
vertical and horizontal centerline
through the vertex reference.
se
U
al
rn
te

In

menu.
C
18. Disable Plane Display .

PT
19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension

the sketch as shown.
20. Click OK .
r
Fo

21. In the dashboard, edit the depth
to Both Sides .
• Edit the depth to 8 and click
Complete Feature .
menu.
23. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
y
nl
O
Volume Tools group.
group.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry
You can edit mold volumes by replacing surfaces and trimming
them to other geometry.
• Replacing surfaces can:

– Add volume.
– Remove volume.
– Add and remove volume
simultaneously.
• Trimming to geometry trims
y
a volume to a specifie
nl
reference.
– Specify the direction to be Figure 1 – Trimming a Volume
O
removed. to Geometry
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Mold Volume Before Figure 3 – Mold Volume After

In
Surface Replace Surface Replace

C
Replacing Surfaces
PT
You can replace a single-mold volume surface with a quilt surface by clicking
the Editing group drop-down menu and selecting Replace . You can use
the Replace option to add volume, remove volume, or simultaneously add
r
and remove volume. In Figures 2 and 3, the bottom mold volume surface
Fo
was replaced with the surface quilt.

By default, the mold volume is “consumed” by the replaced surface feature.
That is, the mold volume is not visible, but still exists previously in the model
tree.
When using the Replace option, there is one option available in the Replaced
Surface dialog box:
• Keep quilt – This enables the quilt selected for the replace to remain visible
after the replace is created. In Figure 3, the quilt was not kept after the
surface replace was created.
The Replace option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are
redefinin the volume. The resulting replaced surface feature appears in the
model tree as a feature called Replaced Surface id.

Trimming to Geometry
You can trim surfaces to other geometry in the mold model by selecting Trim
To Geometry from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the
Volume Tools group.
The Trim To Geometry option is only available if you are creating a volume
or if you are redefinin the volume. The resulting trim to geometry feature
appears in the model tree as a feature called Trim To Geom id. However, the
mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree.
You can trim to geometry as an alternative to extracting a mold volume up
to a surface. However, trimming to geometry has more powerful capabilities
than just this use. Trimming can only remove volume, not add it.
y
When trimming surfaces to geometry, you must specify the following:
nl
• Ref Type – Ref Type specifie what the system uses as the trimming entity.
O
You can specify one of the following:
– Part – This uses a part for trimming.
se
– Quilt – This uses a quilt for trimming.
– Plane – This uses a plane surface or datum plane for trimming.
U
• Reference – Reference enables you to specify the item whose geometry
will be used for trimming. The item that you can select depends on the Ref
al
Type that was specifie . Essentially, the Ref Type acts like a filte for the
rn
Reference selection.
• Direction – This enables you to select a trim feature direction. A direction
te
arrow points in the direction that volume will be trimmed at the reference.
You can select the following references:
In
– Plane – Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specifie plane.

– Curve, Edge, or Axis – These make the direction follow the selected
C
curve, edge, or axis.

– Coordinate System – This makes the direction follow the specifie axis
PT

• Trim Type – Trim Type enables you to specify which side of the trimming
reference will be used when trimming the mold volume. You can select
r
either of the following:

Fo
– Trim By First Reference – This trims the item by the firs reference
surface.
– Trim By Last Reference – This trims the item by the last reference
surface.
• Offset – This offsets the trimming reference in the direction currently
specifie before trimming the geometry.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to
Geometry
Mold\Replace_Trim REPLACE-TRIM.ASM
Task 1: Trim a slider mold volume to existing geometry.

2. Select REPLACE-TRIM_WRK.
PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe.
U
6. Spin the model as shown and
al
notice that the slider mold volume

passes through the reference
rn
model.
te
SLIDER_VOL1, right-click and

In
8. Select Trim To Geometry

from the Trim To Geometry types
C
drop-down menu in the Volume

PT
Tools group.
9. In the Trim To Geom dialog box,
select Quilt as the Ref Type.
r
10. Select the previously created

Fo
quilt as the trimming entity.

MOLD_FRONT from the model
tree as the Direction.
12. Click Flip from the menu
manager until the arrow points
to the left. The volume to the
left of the trimming entity is to be
removed.
manager.

the Trim To Geom dialog box.
15. Notice that the slider mold
volume has been trimmed at the
trimming reference.
Task 2: Replace a mold volume surface with a surface quilt.
y
Skirt Surface id 3055 and select
nl
Unhide .
O
2. Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation.
3. Notice that there is a space
between the bottom of the slider
se
U
mold volume and the surface.
4. Click the Editing group

al

rn
Replace .
te
6. Query-select the bottom surface

In
of the slider mold volume.

C
PT
7. Select the large surface quilt.

8. In the Replaced Surface dialog
box, select Keep quilt and click
r
Fo
Define.
9. Click Yes > Done from the menu
manager and click Preview.

10. In the Replaced Surface dialog
box, select Keep quilt and click
Define.
11. Click No > Done from the menu
manager and click OK.
group.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes
You can swap inserts out of the same core and cavity in the mold
model to produce similarly shaped parts.
• Inserts are used as a cost-saving

measure.
• Inserts are used as a consideration
for machining.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing the
Reference Model
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed Figure 3 – Design Variations That

Insert Can Use Same Core and Cavity
In
Sketching Insert Mold Volumes

C
An insert is another mold component that is typically used as a cost-saving

PT
measure. The mold uses the same core and cavity, but one insert is swapped
for another. Different inserts can be used to create different shapes. Thus,
you can use the same mold to create similar parts simply by switching inserts.
r
In Figure 1, an insert needs to be created for a square cut in the bottom inset
Fo
of the reference model. The resulting insert mold volume is shown in Figure
2. However, the model could have a design variation where, rather than a
square cut in the bottom, there is a round cut in the bottom, which is shown in
Figure 3. In this case, you can create a different insert mold volume, while
you use the same core and cavity.
You can also use inserts in areas that are difficul to machine.
Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you
can use sketch-based features to create insert mold volumes in the mold
model.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Insert Mold Volumes
Mold\Volume_Insert INSERT.ASM
Task 1: Create an insert mold volume in a mold model.

2. Select INSERT_WRK.PRT.
tab.
y
nl
O
Wireframe.
se
6. Notice the square shape cut into
the top of the model.
U
7. Notice that the INSERT_VOL
al
mold volume has been started

and is partially fillin the square
rn
shape.
8. Right-click INSERT_VOL and
te

In
9. Press ALT, query-select the top

of the existing mold volume,
and click Extrude from the
C
Shapes group.
r PT
10. Click Project from the

Fo
Sketching group and select

Loop from the Type dialog box.
11. Query-select the main top
surface of the reference model.

12. In the menu manager, click
Next until the square loop is
highlighted and click Accept.
13. Click Close from the Type dialog
box.
14. Click OK .
15. Edit the depth to 20 and click
y
nl
Complete Feature .
O
se
U
al
Surface id 1753 and select

Unhide .
rn

te
Replace .
In
18. Query-select the bottom of the

large, square, extruded volume.
C
19. In the graphics window, select

PT
Quilt:F14.
20. Click OK from the Replaced
Surface dialog box.
r
Fo

Surface id 2746 and select
Unhide .
Replace .
24. Spin the model and select the
top of the large, square, extruded
y
volume.
nl
Quilt:F15.
O
26. Click OK from the Replaced
Surface dialog box.
27. Select INSERT_REF.PRT,
right-click, and select Hide . se
U
28. Orient to the Standard
al
Orientation.
rn

te
Volume Tools group.

In
30. Select Trim To Geometry

C
from the Trim To Geometry types

PT
drop-down menu.
31. In the Trim To Geom dialog box,
select Quilt as the Ref Type.
r
32. Select LIFTER_VOL2 as the

Fo
Reference.
MOLD_FRONT and click
Okay from the menu manager.
the Trim To Geom dialog box.

group.
LIFTER_VOL2 and select Hide
.
37. Spin the model and view the
completed insert mold volume.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8
y
Parting Lines
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Parting lines generally defin the location where the core, cavity, and other
mold volumes are to be split. In this module, you learn about creating an
automatic parting line using the silhouette curve. You also analyze two
U
specifi options within skirt surface definition slides and loop selection.
al
Objectives
rn

• Explain the reason for creating parting lines as well as the two methods
te
of creation.
• Create an automatic parting line using silhouette curves.
In
• Analyze silhouette curve options including slides and loop selection.

C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Parting Lines
You can create a parting line to help generate parting surfaces
using the Skirt Surface tool.
• Parting line creation methods:

– Automatic – Silhouette Curve
tool.
– Manual – Use datum curve
techniques.
• Only needed for automatic
y
parting surface creation.
nl
O
Figure 1 – Silhouette Curve
se
U Parting Line Created
Understanding Parting Lines

Once the reference model and workpiece are assembled into the mold model,
al
you need to consider where the workpiece will split into the core and cavity to
open the mold. The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface.
rn
If you create the parting surface automatically using the skirt surface, you
te
must firs create a parting line. The parting line is a collection of datum curves
that is created on the reference model. You can then use the parting line
In
to create the skirt surface.

There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting line:
C
• Automatic – The Silhouette Curve tool creates the parting line

PT
automatically. A silhouette curve is a datum curve feature that is created

where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from
positive to negative when viewed from a certain direction.
r
• Manual – You can create datum curves using various modeling techniques
Fo
to create the parting line.

You only need to create a parting line if you plan to use the Skirt
Surface tool to create the parting surface.

Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using
Silhouette Curves
A silhouette curve is created where the draft on the reference
model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when
viewed from the pull direction.
• The automatic parting line is
created using silhouette curves.
• You must defin the following:
– Name
y
– Surface references
nl
– Direction
O
se Figure 1 – Mold Model
U
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve

PT
Parting Line Parting Line
Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using Silhouette Curves

r
Fo
You can create an automatic parting line using the Silhouette Curve tool.
This tool creates the parting line by using silhouette curves. A silhouette
curve is a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the reference
model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from
a certain direction. Figure 3 displays the resulting parting line from the mold
model in Figure 1.
From the mold model standpoint, you must defin the following when creating
the silhouette curve:
• Name – This define the name of the curve as it displays in the model tree.
If desired, you can accept the default name.
• Surface Refs – This specifie the surfaces on which to create the silhouette
curve. By default, the reference model is define as the surface references.
Thus, the silhouette curve is created on the reference model. If the mold
model contains more than one reference model, you must specify the

surface references to be used, and the surface references must all be
selected on the same solid or reference model.
• Direction – This define the direction for creating the silhouette curve. By
default, the specifie direction is the pull direction, although you can specify
a different direction using any of the following options:
– Plane – Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specifie plane.
– Curve, Edge, or Axis – These make the direction follow the selected
curve, edge, or axis.
– Coordinate System – This makes the direction follow the specifie axis
In Figure 2, notice that the silhouette curve is created at all draft transitions
from the pull direction.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating an Automatic Parting Line
Using Silhouette Curves
Mold\Parting-Line_Automatic AUTO-PART-LINE.ASM
Task 1: Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

2. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_
WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe.
U
al
contains a hole in its top surface.

rn

the Design Features group.
te

Curve dialog box.
In
C
r PT
Fo
9. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_

REF.PRT, right-click, and select
Hide .
10. Spin the model, and notice that
the silhouette curve is comprised
of two loops.
Access toolbar.

Task 2: Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

COVER-PART-LINE.ASM.
2. Select the COVER-PART-LINE_
WRK.PRT.
tab.
y
nl
Wireframe.
O
contains four circular holes and
se
one rectangular hole. U
7. Click Silhouette Curve .
al
Curve dialog box.

rn
te
In
9. Zoom in on the top of the model

and notice that there is a curve
C
around each hole in the top

surface.
r PT
Fo

11. Notice that there is another curve
around the entire bottom edge of
12. Notice that there is only one
silhouette curve feature created
in the model tree.

13. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
menu.
15. Notice that there is a curve
created at every location
where the draft instantaneously
changes from positive to
negative.
y
nl
menu.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides
The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that
already account for undercut geometry zones in the reference
model.
• The system excludes silhouette

curve creation at slides.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Mold Model and
U
Slider Mold Volumes
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve without Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve

Slides Specifie with Slides Specifie
r
Fo
Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides

Recall that a silhouette curve is created in a mold model where the draft
on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative
when viewed from the pull direction. Because undercut areas can also cause
draft to instantaneously change, the system may also create the silhouette
curve along undercut geometry zones.
The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that already account
for undercut geometry zones in the reference model. When mold volumes
are specified the system automatically excludes these unnecessary edges
and creates correct parting curves.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options:
Slides
Mold\Parting-Line_Slides CURVE-SLIDES.ASM
Task 1: Specify mold volumes to exclude undercut areas during silhouette

curve creation.

2. Select the CURVE-SLIDES_
y
WRK.PRT.
nl
O
tab.
se
Wireframe.
U
al
6. Notice that the mold model

contains three slider mold
rn
volumes.
te

In
8. Click Preview from the Silhouette

Curve dialog box.
C
9. Notice that the system attempts

PT
to create the same silhouette

curves for the undercut geometry
that the slider mold volumes
already created.
r
Fo

box, select Slides and click
Define.
11. Press CTRL and select the three
slider mold volumes.
12. Click Done Refs > Done/Return

Curve dialog box.
14. Notice that the system no longer
creates silhouette curves for the
undercut geometry.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop
Selection
The Loop Selection option enables you to control the location of
curve segments in reference to the part edges and specify which
loops are included in the curve.
• Loop selection:
– Loops created at every
shutoff location.
– Status options:
y
♦ Included
nl
♦ Excluded
• Chain selection options:
O
– Upper
– Lower Figure 1 – Included Versus
– Single
se Excluded Loops
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Upper Versus Lower Chains

C
Including and Excluding Silhouette Curve Loops

PT
During silhouette curve creation, the system may create curves along edges
that you do not want included. You can selectively remove curves along
edges that you do not want curves created for using the Loop Selection
r
option in the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

Fo
Selecting the Loop Selection option causes the Loop Selection dialog box
to appear. The Loops tab in the Loop Selection dialog box lists the loops
of curves which comprise the silhouette curve, and whether their status is
Included or Excluded. When you select a loop in the dialog box, it highlights
in the mold model.
Loops are typically created at every location in the mold model where there is
a shutoff. A shutoff is any surface where the mold core and cavity contact.
When the mold closes the core and cavity it creates a seal that shuts off
that area of the mold. One loop typically is created along the exterior of the
reference model. Other loops are created at each interior hole or cut. Loops
are also created at areas of undercut geometry.
Loops are, by default, included in the fina silhouette curve, although you can
exclude any loop from the fina silhouette curve. The most common reason
loops are excluded is because the shutoff at that specifi location is being

formed by a slider or saddle. In Figure 1, the two loops around the opening
are excluded.
Another way to exclude loops created by undercuts is to use the

Slides Silhouette Curve option.
Specifying Edges for Silhouette Curve Creation

When the system encounters a vertical surface or a surface that has no draft
for which a silhouette curve loop is to be included, the system may select the
wrong edge to create the silhouette curve along. In most cases you can
change which edge to create the silhouette curve along. The following status
y
• Upper – The chain is currently located at the uppermost edges of a vertical
nl
surface. The upper edge is higher relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull
direction, as shown in the left image of Figure 2. When the chain is
O
specifie as upper, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur
in the core mold component.
se
• Lower – The chain is currently located at the lowermost edges of a vertical
surface. The lower edge is lower relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull
U
direction, as shown in the right image of Figure 2. When the chain is
specifie as lower, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur
in the cavity mold component.
al
• Single – You cannot move the chain for a Single location because the
rn
edges that the chain lies on are associated with a drafted surface.
The Chains tab in the Loop Selection dialog box displays both the chain
te
number, and its status. The chain number is displayed as A-B, where A is
the corresponding loop number from the Loops tab that the chain belongs
In
to, and B is an incremental number for multiple chains belonging to a single

loop, starting with 0. For example, if there are three chains belonging to loop
C
number 1, then the three chains are numbered 1-0, 1-1, and 1-2.
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options:
Loop Selection
Mold\Parting-Line_Loop LOOP-SELECTION.ASM
Task 1: Exclude loops of a silhouette curve.

LOOP-SELECTION_WRK.PRT
y
nl
and select Hide .
O
4. Click Preview from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.
5. Notice the silhouette curve that se
U
is to be created.
al

box, select Loop Selection and
rn
click Define.
7. Notice that the Loop Selection
te
dialog box contains three loops.

• Select loop number 1.
In
8. Notice that this outer loop

highlights blue in the graphics
C
window. You want to keep this

PT
loop.
9. In the Loop Selection dialog box,

select loop number 2.
r
Fo
10. Notice that this loop is on the

right side of the opening.
You later handle
this opening using
a method other than
silhouette curves, so it
needs to be excluded
from the silhouette
curve.

click Exclude.

select loop number 3 and notice
that this loop is on the left side
of the opening.
Again, you handle
this opening using a
method other than
silhouette curves, so it
needs to be excluded
from the silhouette
curve.
y
nl
click Exclude.
O
Task 2: Switch the location of chains for a loop in a silhouette curve.
se
select the Chains tab.
U
• Select chain number 1-0.
• Notice that its status is
al
Single. This chain is on a

drafted surface and cannot be
rn
changed.
te
In

select chain number 1-1.
C
• Press CTRL and select chain

PT
number 1-2.
• Notice that both of their
Statuses are Upper.
r
• Notice that both chains are to

Fo
be created on the upper edges

of the vertical surfaces.

click Lower to switch both chains
to the lower edges of the vertical
surfaces.
• Click OK.
Curve dialog box.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9
y
Skirt Surfaces
nl
O
Module Overview
se
A parting surface is a surface feature that you can use to split a workpiece or
an existing volume, including surfaces of one or more reference parts. You
can create parting surfaces automatically by using the skirt surface technique.
U
In this module, you learn how to create a skirt surface, and examine each of
al
the different options available during skirt surface creation.

rn
Objectives
te
• Explain the reason for creating parting surfaces as well as the two methods
In
of creation.
• Create a skirt surface.
C
• Analyze various skirt surface options, including extending curves, tangent

conditions, extension directions, and shutoff extensions.
r PT
Fo

Understanding Parting Surfaces
You can create parting surfaces to define where mold volumes
are to be split.
• Parting surface creation methods:
– Automatic – Skirt Surface
tool
– Manual – Use surfacing
techniques
y
Figure 1 – Parting Surface
nl
Created Automatically
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Parting Surface

rn
Created Manually
te
Understanding Parting Surfaces

In
The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface. The parting
surface is generally perpendicular to the pull direction and lies between
the parting line edges of the reference model and the outside walls of the
C
workpiece.
PT
There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting
surface:
• Automatic – The Skirt Surface tool creates the parting surface
r
automatically. If you use the skirt surface tool, you must firs create a
Fo
parting line to use.

• Manual – You can create the parting surface using basic and advanced
surface creation techniques.
Parting Surface Criteria
You must remember the following criteria when creating parting surfaces:
• A parting surface must intersect the workpiece or mold volume completely.
You can merge multiple surfaces together.
• A parting surface cannot intersect itself.
• You can use any surface as a parting surface as long as the firs two
criteria are met.
• Parting surface features are created at the assembly level in the mold
model.

Creating a Skirt Surface
You can use a skirt surface to automatically create the mold
model parting surface.
• The skirt surface is created using
specifie datum curves.
– The silhouette curve parting line
is usually selected.
• Inner holes in the reference model
are fille using silhouette curve
loops.
y
• Outer curve loops are extended to
nl
the workpiece boundaries.
• Numerous options available to
O
account for different types of
model geometry. Figure 1 – Viewing the Silhouette
se
U Curve Parting Line
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed

Skirt Surface
PT
Creating a Skirt Surface

r
You can create the parting surface for a mold model by using Parting
Fo
Surface in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. The system can
help you automatically create a parting surface by using the Skirt Surface
tool. This tool helps you automatically create a parting surface by creating
a skirt surface. The skirt surface can be considered as a “super feature.” It
contains numerous options that you can defin to help account for different
types of model geometry.
The parting surface is ultimately used to split the mold model into the mold
core and mold cavity. You can think of the parting surface as the location of
all metal-to-metal contact between the mold core and cavity.
To create the skirt surface you must specify the curves that the system should
use. You can specify curves in any of the following ways:
• One By One – Enables you to select individual curves or edges.
• Curve Chain – Enables you to select a chain of curves.

• Feat Curves – Enables you to select all curves that belong to the specifie
feature.
The skirt surface is usually created by specifying an existing parting line
silhouette curve. The silhouette curve is selected using the Feat Curves
method of specifying curves. However, if you do not want to use the entire
silhouette curve, or if you want to use the silhouette curve in conjunction with
other datum curves, you can use the Curve Chain or One By One options.
The Ref Model, Workpiece, and Direction must also be define to create the
skirt surface. However, if the process workflo has been followed, these
items should have already been automatically define for you. The Ref
Model is the reference model used in the mold model, the Workpiece is the
workpiece used in the mold model, and the Direction is the pull direction of
y
the mold model.
nl
Once you have specifie these items, the system classifie each closed
loop of curves into one of two types:
O
• Inner loops – Loops that are fille by the skirt surface.
se
• Outer loops – Loops that the skirt surface extends outward through.
Usually, the system is able to automatically determine the loop classification .
U
Once the classification are made, the system automatically creates the skirt
parting surface feature by doing the following:
al
• It fill the inner holes (shutoffs) in the reference model using the inner
rn
loops from the Silhouette curve or other selected datum curve. In Figure
2, all fiv interior shutoffs have been fille using loops from the specifie
silhouette curve.
te
• It extends the outer loops of the Silhouette curve or other datum curve to
In
the boundaries of the workpiece. In Figure 2, the skirt surface extends out
to the boundaries of the workpiece.
C
Similar to mold volumes, you can rename the parting surface by starting
the Parting Surface tool, right-clicking, and selecting Properties, or clicking
PT
Properties from the Controls group.

r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating a Skirt Surface
Mold\Skirt-Surface SKIRT-SURFACE.ASM
Task 1: Create a skirt surface in a mold model.

2. Select the SKIRT-SURFACE_
WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
6. Select the silhouette curve that se
U
has already been created.
al
7. Notice that the silhouette curve

consists of six loops – one
rn
around the entire reference

model and one loop each for
te
each interior shutoff.

In
8. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume
group.
C
9. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group.

PT
10. Select the silhouette curve

and click Done from the menu
manager.
r

Fo
dialog box.
group.
13. Notice that all fiv interior
silhouette curve loops have been
fille by the skirt surface.
14. Notice also that the skirt surface
has been extended from the
outer silhouette curve loop to the
sides of the workpiece.

15. Spin the model so that you
can view the underside of the
reference model.
Task 2: Edit the silhouette curve chain status to modify the skirt surface.
y
nl
1. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.
2. Notice that the skirt surface for
O
each shutoff is located on the
outer reference model surface.
Standard Orientation. se
U
al
4. Edit the definitio of SILH_CURVE_1.

rn
5. Click Suspend All from the menu manager to temporarily suspend

the skirt surface feature.
te
6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection.

In

select the Chains tab.
• Select chain 2-1, press CTRL,
C
and select chains 4-1, 5-1, and

PT
6-1.
• Click Lower to switch the
status of the four loops.
r
• Click OK.
Fo

Curve dialog box.

9. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.
10. Notice that the skirt surface is
located on the inner reference
model surface.
y
11. Spin the model so that you
nl
can view the underside of the
reference model and inspect the
O
skirt surface.
se
U
al

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves
The Extend Curves option provides a further level of control
that enables you to exclude curves from being extended during
skirt surface creation.
• By default, all selected curves are
included.
• The Extend Curves option enables
you to exclude curve segments.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Default Skirt Surface
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 3 – Additional Curve

te
Figure 2 – Curve Segments Excluded Segment Excluded

In
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves

By default, all curves selected for the skirt surface are extended either inward
C
or outward to create the surface. The Extend Curves option provides a further
PT
level of control to exclude curves from being extended.

The Extend Curves tab in the Extension Control dialog box contains two
columns:
r
• Include Curve – Specifie which curve segments are extended in the skirt
Fo
surface.
• Exclude Curve – Specifie which curve segments are not extended in the
skirt surface.
Every curve specifie for the skirt surface is broken up into segments.
Each segment is displayed in the Extend Curves tab. By default, all curve
segments are located in the Include Curve column of the tab, meaning that
they are all extended. You can exclude curve segments from being extended
by moving them over to the Exclude Curve column of the tab. When you
place the cursor over a given curve segment it highlights in the graphics
window so you can determine where it is located in the reference model.
When creating a skirt surface, you can either select an entire silhouette
curve and then exclude curve segments as desired, or you can simply
select the desired curves one by one for the skirt surface definitio . Either
way, you achieve the same resultant skirt surface. The method you use is

determined by what is most efficien . For example, if there are 20 segments
in a silhouette curve and you need 18 of them for the skirt surface, it would
be most efficien to select the entire silhouette curve and then exclude the
two unneeded curve segments. Conversely, if you only need 2 of the 20
curve segments, it would be more efficien to individually select the two
desired curves, rather than selecting the entire curve and then excluding
the unneeded 18 curve segments.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend
Curves
Mold\Skirt-Surface_Extend EXTEND-CURVES.ASM
Task 1: Exclude curves from a skirt surface in a mold model.

2. Notice the silhouette curve that
has already been created.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
Volume group.
rn
4. Click Skirt Surface tool from

the Surfacing group.
te
5. Select the silhouette curve

In
manager.
6. Click Preview from the Skirt
C
Surface dialog box.

PT
7. Click Repaint .
8. Notice that the surface extends
out from all curve segments of
r
the silhouette curve.

Fo

box, select Curve 213.
11. Notice that the curve segment
highlights in the graphics
window.

box, press SHIFT and select
Curve 216.
13. Notice that all four curve
segments are selected and
highlight in the graphics window.
14. Click Exclude Curve to
exclude these curve segments.
15. Click OK from the Extension
y
Control dialog box.
nl
dialog box.
O
se
group.
18. Notice that the skirt surface is
U
not created through the excluded
curve segments.
al
19. Edit the definitio of the Skirt

rn
Surface id 223.
te
In
box, select Curve 213 and click

Include Curve .
C
• Click OK.
PT

dialog box.

r
Fo

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent
Conditions
The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces
on the reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must
be tangent.
• Specify which surfaces the skirt
surface must be tangent to.
• You can exclude adjacent curve
segments from the tangent
condition.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – No Tangent Condition
Applied to Skirt Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Tangent Condition Figure 3 – Curves Excluded from

Applied to Skirt Surface Tangent Condition
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions

r
Fo
The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces on the

reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must be tangent when
extending through the parting line curves.
You must specify the following when definin tangent conditions for the skirt
surface:
• Tangent surfaces – Specify the reference model surfaces adjacent to the
parting curve to which the skirt surface must be tangent.
• Include Curve – The skirt surface must extend through these curves
tangent to the adjacent surfaces. By default, all curves adjacent to the
selected surfaces are included.
• Exclude Curve – The tangent condition is not applied to the curves in this
column of the Tangent Conditions tab.
In Figure 1, no tangent conditions have been applied to the resulting skirt
surface. In Figure 2, the tangent condition has been applied to all outer

surfaces of the reference model. Consequently, the skirt surface extends
through the parting line tangent to the adjacent surfaces. However, in Figure
3, all but the left and right curves have been excluded from the tangent
condition. As a result, the skirt surface is only tangent to the left and right
reference model surfaces.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options:
Tangent Conditions
Mold\Skirt-Surface_Tangent TANGENT-COND.ASM
Task 1: Create an automatic parting surface.

2. Select TANGENT-COND_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style > Wireframe.
O
se
6. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume
group.
U
7. Click Skirt Surface from the
Surfacing group.
al
8. Select silhouette curve

rn
PART-LINE and click Done

te

dialog box.
In

group.
C
11. Notice that the parting surface

PT
extends normal to the workpiece

boundary.
r
Fo

Task 2: Set tangent conditions for the skirt surface.
1. Edit the definitio of Skirt

Surface id 388.
3. In the Extension Control
dialog box, select the Tangent
Conditions tab.
4. In the Tangent Conditions tab,
click Select Tangent Surfaces
y
.
nl
5. Press CTRL and select the eight
O
outer surfaces that are adjacent
to the silhouette curve.
se
6. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
7. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
U
Surface dialog box.
al

rn
the skirt surface now extends

tangent to the surfaces adjacent
te
to the silhouette curve.

In
C

PT
double-click Extension and

select the Tangent Conditions
tab.
r

Fo
box, click Select Included

Curves .
• Press CTRL and select the six
curves highlighted green.
• Click OK from the Select
dialog box.
• Click Exclude Curve and
click OK.

dialog box.
14. Spin the model and notice
that, while the skirt surface
still extends from the selected
curves, it is only tangent to the
curves included in the tangent
conditions.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension
Directions
You can add or modify the direction that the skirt surface
extends from the silhouette curve segments.
• Extension directions can
significantl alter the shape
of the skirt surface.
• Arrows denote direction at each
segment vertex.
y
– Orange – Default direction
nl
– Cyan – User-define direction
– Red – Tangent direction
O
• Select location and direction
reference.
se
Figure 1 – Extension Direction
U
Modifie
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Viewing Default Figure 3 – Viewing User-Define

Extension Directions Extension Directions
r
Fo
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions

By default, when the skirt surface extends from a silhouette curve, it extends
normal to the curve. The direction of extension is define at every curve
segment endpoint. If the directions at the curve endpoints overlap, the skirt
surface will fail.
You can modify the direction of extension for the curve endpoints in the
Extension Directions tab of the Extension Control dialog box. This enables
you to significantl change the resulting shape of the skirt surface. For
example, in Figure 1, the extension directions for the left side of the skirt
surface have been modified causing the resulting shape to be different.
When you select the Extension Directions tab, the extension directions for
each of the curve segment endpoints displays in the graphics window.
Consider the following points regarding extension directions:

• Default extension directions display with orange arrows, as shown in
Figure 2.
• Extension directions that you have modifie or added display with cyan
arrows, as shown in Figure 3.
• If you apply tangent conditions to curve segments for the skirt surface, the
extension directions display with red arrows.
Modifying and Adding Extension Directions

You can modify extension directions as a means to solve a failing skirt
surface, or you can modify them simply to modify the shape of the resulting
parting surface. You can also add additional extension directions.
y
To modify or add an extension direction, you must specify the following:
nl
• Location – You can either select an existing included extend curve endpoint
or create a datum point at a new location where you want to add an
O
extension direction.
• Direction reference – This specifie the direction in which the skirt surface
se
will be extended. You can select any of the following references:
– Plane – The skirt surface is extended perpendicular to the plane. You
U
can select either datum planes or planar surfaces.
– Curve, Edge, or Axis – The skirt surface is extended along the direction
al
of the specifie curve, edge, or axis.

– Coordinate System – The skirt surface is extended along the specifie
rn
coordinate system axis, which you must specify.

te
Each added or modifie extension direction displays in the Extension

Directions tab as a point set. For each define point set, you can perform the
In
following operations:
• Remove – This enables you to remove the point set.
C
• Redefin – This enables you to select a different location for the point set.
PT
• Direction – This enables you to select a different direction reference.

You can also add new point sets.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options:
Extension Directions
Mold\Skirt-Surface_Direction EXTEND-DIR.ASM
Task 1: Modify the extension directions of a skirt surface in a mold model.

2. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
O
se
6. Click Parting Surface and click Skirt Surface .
7. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT, select the silhouette curve, and click
U
Done from the menu manager.
8. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.
al
9. Notice that the skirt surface fails.

rn
10. Also notice the warning message in the Message Log.

te
In

C
PT
12. Notice the warning message

and notice where the problem
is occurring based on the
highlighted curve segments.
r
Fo

box.
14. Select the Extension Directions

tab.
15. Notice the default direction
arrows at the problem area at
the lower right are pointing in two
different directions.

16. In the Extension Directions tab,
click Add.
• Select the vertex shown.
• Click Done from the menu
manager.
17. Select the right workpiece

surface and click Okay from the
menu manager.
y
18. Notice the new user-define
direction at the vertex.
nl
O
19. Click OK from the Extension
Control dialog box.
20. Click Preview from the Skirt se
U
Surface dialog box and rotate
the model to observe the parting
al
surface.
rn
te
In
Task 2: Add an extension direction to a skirt surface.

C

PT
click Saved Orientations

and select BACK.
2. Notice that the bottom of the skirt
r
surface curves upward.

Fo
3. Click Saved Orientations

and select 3D.
4. Enable Plane Display and Point Display .

double-click Extension and
select the Extension Directions
tab.
• Click Add.
• Prehighlight datum point PNT0
and select it.
• Click Done from the menu
manager.
6. Prehighlight datum plane
EXTENSION_DIR, select it,
y
and click Okay from the menu
nl
manager.
O
7. Notice the new user-define
direction and click OK from the
Extension Control dialog box.
dialog box. se
U
al
group.
10. Spin the model and observe the
rn
skirt surface.
te
11. Disable Plane Display and

In
Point Display .
12. Orient to the BACK view
C
orientation and notice that the

PT
surface no longer curves upward.

r
Fo

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff
Extension
You can specify a location other than the workpiece boundaries
that the skirt surface extends to.
• ShutOff Extension options:

– ShutOff Dist — Uniform offset
– Boundary — Sketch or select
• ShutOff Plane — Shutoff extension
y
extends up to the shutoff plane
nl
• Draft Angle — Applies draft to
Z-direction shutoff extension
O
surfaces
Figure 1 – Shutoff Distance
se
Specifie for Shutoff Extension
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Selected Boundary Figure 3 – Sketched Boundary

Shutoff Extension Shutoff Extension
r
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension

Fo
By default, the outer loops of a specifie silhouette curve are extended to the
boundaries of the workpiece. This may cause an undesirable shape in the
resulting core and cavity mold components.
You can specify a shutoff extension to stop the skirt surface from extending
all the way out to the workpiece boundaries by using the ShutOff Ext option
in the Skirt Surface dialog box. The ShutOff Ext option enables you to
specify the amount of extension toward the workpiece boundaries that the
skirt surface will undergo before stopping, extending in the pull direction,
and finall stopping at the workpiece boundaries. There are two methods
available for specifying the shutoff extension location:
• ShutOff Dist – Specifie a uniform offset value around the silhouette curve
perimeter that the skirt surface will extend. In Figure 1, a shutoff distance
of 2 was specifie .

• Boundary – Enables you to specify your own boundary that the skirt
surface will extend out to. You can use either of the following two methods
to specify the boundary:
– Select – Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary. In
Figure 2, the sketch created on the top surface of the workpiece was
selected as the boundary.
– Sketch – Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fl by specifying
the sketch plane, reference plane, and reference direction. In Figure 3,
the boundary was sketched on the top surface of the workpiece.
Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form
a closed loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a
specifi sketching plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular to
the pull direction. However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the pull
y
direction, so if the boundary is created on a plane that is not normal to the
nl
pull direction, you may not get the expected result.
O
When the skirt surface extends outward from the silhouette curve, it stops
either at the workpiece boundaries or a shutoff extension, whichever it
encounters firs . If the selected boundary falls outside of the workpiece
se
boundaries, the skirt surface will stop at the workpiece boundaries. In Figure
3, only one of the four sides of the sketched square boundary falls within
U
the workpiece boundaries. Hence, the skirt surface stops extending at the
workpiece boundaries on three sides, and at the sketched boundary on the
al
fourth side.
rn
Specifying the ShutOff Plane

The ShutOff Plane option is used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
te
option. The shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension
extends to. The shutoff extension extends in the positive or negative Z-axis
In
(pull direction) up to the shutoff plane and finall extends outward again to
the workpiece boundaries. The shutoff plane specifie in all three figure
is the one that is displayed.
C
While the ShutOff Plane is optional in the Skirt Surface dialog box, it is a
PT
required reference if a shutoff extension is define . Without the shutoff plane

defined the shutoff extension does not extend at all in the Z-axis, and
therefore is not used.
r
The following rules apply to the shutoff plane reference specified

Fo
• The reference you specify must be planar.

• There can be only one shutoff plane specifie .
• The shutoff plane must be normal to the pull direction.
• The shutoff plane may be above the skirt surface. However, the resulting
extension may not create valid geometry for a mold parting line.
Specifying the Draft Angle

The Draft Angle option is also used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
option, although it is not a requirement. The draft angle option drafts the
Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by the specifie draft angle
value. You might want to apply a draft angle to these surfaces to help with
wear in the resulting mold core and cavity. Note that you can only specify a
positive draft angle. The draft angle specifie in all three figure is 6.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff
Extension
Mold\Skirt-Surface_ShutOff SHUTOFF-EXT.ASM
Task 1: Create a shutoff extension by specifying an offset distance.

Display types:
y
2. Select SHUTOFF-EXT_WRK.
nl
PRT.
O
tab.
se
U
Wireframe.
al
6. Notice the skirt surface shape.

rn
7. Edit the definitio of Skirt

Surface id 1501.
te

double-click ShutOff Ext.
In

ShutOff Dist, type 2 as the
C
value, and press ENTER.

PT

Surface dialog box and click
Repaint .
r
11. Notice that there is no difference

Fo
in the skirt surface shape.

double-click ShutOff Plane.
• Select datum plane SHUTOFF
and click Done/Return from
the menu manager.
• Click Preview.
13. Click Repaint and notice
that the shutoff extension now
extends to the shutoff plane.

double-click Draft Angle.
• Type 6 as the value, press
ENTER, and click Preview.
15. Click Repaint and notice that
the shutoff extension surfaces
have been drafted.
y
Task 2: Select a new shutoff extension boundary.
nl
1. Double-click ShutOff Ext.
O
Boundary > Select > One By
se
One.
3. Query-select the entire
U
SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch
manager.
al
rn

te
Surface dialog box and click

.
In
Repaint
5. Notice the new shutoff extension
shape.
C
6. Notice that the shutoff extension

PT
still extends to the shutoff plane.

7. Notice that the shutoff extension
surfaces are still drafted.
r
Fo

Task 3: Sketch a new shutoff extension boundary.
1. Double-click ShutOff Ext.

Boundary > Sketch.
3. Select the top workpiece surface
as the sketch plane.
4. Click Okay > Default from the
menu manager.
MOLD_FRONT and the right
y
workpiece surface as references,
nl
and click Close from the
References dialog box.
O
se
.
U
7. Select Center Rectangle
from the Rectangle types
al
drop-down menu and sketch,

constrain, and dimension the
rn
sketch, as shown.
te
In
8. Click OK .
C
dialog box.
r PT
Fo

Module 10
y
Parting Surface Creation
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In addition to using the Skirt Surface tool to help you automatically
generate the parting surface, you can also use the Shadow Surface tool
to automatically create a parting surface. You can also use a series of
U
other tools to manually create the different parts of the parting surface. The
different parts can be merged together to form the fina parting surface.
al
In this module, you learn about the shadow surface and various manual
rn
parting surface tools.

te
Objectives
In
• Explain the various tools you can use to edit and manipulate surfaces.
• Merge surfaces.
C
• Create a shadow surface.

PT
• Create a parting surface manually.

• Create saddle shutoff surfaces.
r
• Create fil surfaces.

Fo
• Extend curves.
• Fill loops.
• Create shut offs by closing all loops, by selecting loops, and by capping
surfaces.

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation
Tools
When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and
manipulate quilts to achieve your desired design intent.
• Tools include:
– Extend
– Trim
– Copy and Paste
y
– Offset
nl
– Mirror
– Merge
O
Figure 1 – Extending a Surface to Plane
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Trimming a Quilt

using Geometry Figure 3 – Mirroring a Quilt
In
Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools

C
When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and manipulate

PT
quilts to achieve your desired design intent. You can use the following tools
to edit and manipulate surfaces.
Surface editing and manipulation tools are covered in greater detail
r
Fo
in PTC's surfacing courses.
Extending Surfaces
You can extend a quilt using either of the following methods:
• Extend Original Surface — Extends the surface boundary edge chain

along the original surface. This option has three additional options that
determine how the extension is created:
– Same — Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface
(for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original
surface is extended past its selected boundary edge chain, and does
not create an additional surface patch. This is the default extend option.
– Tangent — Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the
original surface. With this option an additional surface patch is created.

– Approximate — Creates the extension as a boundary blend between the
boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension.
This method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that
does not lie along a straight edge. With this option an additional surface
patch is created.
• Extend Surface To Plane — Extends the boundary edge chain up to
a specifie plane in the direction normal to this plane. With this option an
additional surface patch is created.
Trimming Surfaces
A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except that it trims away a portion
of a surface. You can create a surface trim as an extrude, revolve, sweep,
y
blend, and so on. You can also trim a selected surface quilt using other
nl
geometry such as planes, quilts, and curves or edges.
O
Once you have specifie the surface to be trimmed and the entity to do the
trimming, you must specify which side is to be kept. You can opt to keep one
side, the other side, or both sides.
Copying and Pasting Surfaces se

U
Copying and pasting surfaces enables you to create an overlay of a surface
so that you can then perform manipulations to the copied surface. You can
al
copy and paste any surface or surface set, either from a quilt or a solid. You
rn
can use either CTRL+C and CTRL+V or the Copy and Paste icons
from the Operations group in the ribbon. You should only use the Copy
te
functionality in situations where you do not have proper references to create

the parting surfaces. The copy functionality can result in a lot of surface
In
features, especially when you are working with a complex design.
Offsetting Surfaces
C
You can create a surface quilt offset a distance value from another quilt or a
PT
solid surface. The offset surface remains dependent on the original surface.
When offsetting surfaces, you can specify the fi type as either Normal to
Surface, Automatic Fit, or Controlled Fit.
r
Fo
Mirroring Surfaces
You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it. To mirror a quilt, select the
quilt and click Mirror , specifying a reference plane for the mirror. A new
surface feature is created.
Merging Surfaces
You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts to create surfaces
with 2-sided edges. Merging surfaces is covered more in depth in other topics.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Surface Editing and
Manipulation Tools
Mold\Surface_Manipulate EDIT-MANIPULATE.PRT
Task 1: Extend a surface in a part model.

Display types:
y
2. Select feature Revolve 1 and
nl
select the top surface edge.
3. Click Extend from the Editing
O
group.
se
4. In the dashboard, click Extend
Surface To Plane and select
datum plane EXTEND from the
U
model tree.
al
rn

from the dashboard.
te

In
C
PT
Task 2: Trim a surface in a part model.

r
Fo
1. Select Revolve 1.
2. Select Quilt:F5.
3. Click Trim from the Editing
group.
4. Select the projected curve.

Mirror the quilt in the part model.
y
Task 3:
nl
1. Select Revolve 1 and select
O
Quilt:F5.
2. Click Mirror from the Editing
se
group and select datum plane
MIRROR.
U
al
rn
Task 4: Offset a quilt in the part model.

te
1. Select Revolve 1 and select

Quilt:F5.
In
2. Click Offset from the Editing

group.
C
3. In the dashboard, type 40 as the

PT
offset value and press ENTER.

r

Fo
Task 5: Copy and paste a portion of a surface quilt.

2. Edit the selection filte to
Geometry.
3. Query-select the lowest surface
of the mirrored quilt.
4. Press CTRL and query-select the
highest surface of the mirrored
quilt.

5. Press CTRL+C to copy the
surfaces and press CTRL+V to
paste the surfaces.
7. In the model tree, select Mirror
1, right-click, and select Hide
.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Merging Surfaces
Merging a quilt is required for operations such as creating solids
from quilts.
• Colors:
– Orange = one-sided
edges.
– Purple = two-sided
edges.
• Merge makes one-sided
edges two-sided.
y
• Merge options:
nl
– Intersect
– Join
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Surface Merge Keep Options
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Figure 2 – Surfaces Edge Figure 3 – Surface Edge Display

Display of Separate Quilts of Merged Quilts
Merging Surfaces
r
Fo
You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts. Merging a quilt
makes it selectable as a single entity for other operations, and is required for
operations such as creating solids from quilts.
Remember the following:
• Surfaces are shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges.
• Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
• Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges because they border two surface
patches.
Therefore:
• Merging a surface results in the creation of two-sided edges from one-sided
edges. In Figure 2, the adjacent quilt surface edges are separate,
one-sided edges, as they display in orange. In Figure 3, the quilts have
been merged to form two-sided, purple edges.

• Merged surface edges appear in purple.
Merge Options
There are two types of merge operations, used for different surface geometry:
• Intersect – Primarily used for intersecting quilts, when a trimming effect is
desired, although it can be used on adjacent quilts. The Intersect option
provides up to two fli arrows, enabling four possible geometry outcomes,
as shown in Figure 1. Intersect is the default merge option.
• Join – Recommended for use on adjacent quilts. Join can also be used to
join surfaces when no trimming effect is desired. For example, you could
join two surfaces that meet in a “T,” without having to decide which sides
to keep.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Merging Surfaces
Surface_Operations\Merge MERGE.PRT
Task 1: Merge surfaces in a part model.

2. Select the oval surface.
3. Press CTRL and select the
boundary surface.
y
nl
4. In the ribbon, click Merge
from the Editing group.
O
Options tab.
• Select Intersect, if necessary.
6. Click Preview Feature . se
U
al
8. In the Merge dashboard, click

rn
Change Second Quilt Side .

te

In
C
PT

11. In the graphics window, click
both arrows to fli them.
r
Fo

14. In the dashboard, click Change
Second Quilt Side .
15. Click Complete Feature and

Task 2: Join surfaces in a part model.
1. In the model tree, press CTRL

and select JOIN1, JOIN2, and
JOIN3.
2. Right-click and select Unhide
.
select No Hidden from the
y
nl
menu.
5. Notice the one-sided orange
O
edges between the main surface
and the three “joined” surfaces.
6. Press CTRL and select the main
center quilt and right quilt. se
U
7. In the ribbon, click Merge
al
from the Editing group.

rn
Options tab.
• Select Join.
te
In
9. Press CTRL and drag a window

C
around all quilts to select them.

PT

11. Notice that the edges between
r
the main surface and three

Fo
joined surfaces are two-sided

purple edges.
menu.

Creating a Shadow Surface
The Shadow Surface tool drapes a parting surface on top of the
reference part geometry.
• A shadow surface creates a parting

surface automatically.
• Comparisons between a skirt
surface.
• Options:
– Clip Plane
y
– Loop Closure
nl
– ShutOff Ext/ShutOff Plane/Draft
Angle
O
– Shadow Slides Figure 1 – Viewing Mold Model
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 3 – Specifying a
Figure 2 – Viewing a Shadow Surface ShutOff Extension
In
Creating a Shadow Surface

C
A shadow surface is another type of parting surface you can create

PT
automatically. The Shadow Surface tool drapes a parting surface on top of

the reference part geometry. The following are prerequisites for creating a
shadow surface:
r
• The workpiece must be visible (it cannot be hidden or blanked).

Fo
• The model must be completely drafted.
Comparison of Shadow Surfaces and Skirt Surfaces

Because both skirt surfaces and shadow surfaces can be used to
automatically create a parting, consider the following comparisons:
• The skirt surface requires a silhouette curve while a shadow surface does
not.
• The skirt surface may have vertical surfaces because the silhouette curve
determines the upper or lower loop of the non-drafted sections. Since the
shadow surface does not use a silhouette curve, a design model must
be fully drafted.
• With the skirt surface, you can exclude segments that fail. The shadow
surface has no option to exclude failed segments.

• There is no extension control with the shadow surface. You cannot extend
curves, specify tangent conditions, or modify extension directions.
Shadow Surface Options

The following options are available when creating a shadow surface:
• Boundary Reference – Define the outer limits of the shadow surface.
Depending on the reference model and workpiece, you may have to specify
the workpiece as the boundary reference.
• Direction – Specifie the direction that the shadow surface is draped onto
the reference model. By default, the direction is opposite that of the pull
direction.
y
• Clip Plane – Specifie the location where the shadow surface stops.
nl
• Loop Closure – Specifie the loops that the shadow surface closes. By
default, the system closes all inner loops of the reference model, but you
O
can select specifi loops if desired.
• ShutOff Ext – Enables you to specify the amount of extension toward the
se
boundary references that the shadow surface will undergo before stopping,
extending in the pull direction, and finall stopping at the boundary
references. When the shadow surface extends outward, it stops either at
U
the boundary references or a shutoff extension, whichever it encounters
firs . If the selected boundary falls outside of the boundary references,
al
the shadow surface will stop at the boundary references. There are two
methods available for specifying the shutoff extension location:
rn
– ShutOff Dist – Specifie a uniform offset value around the reference

model perimeter that the shadow surface will extend.
te
– Boundary – Enables you to specify your own boundary that the shadow
In
surface will extend out to. You can use either of the following two
methods to specify the boundary:
♦ Select – Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary.
C
♦ Sketch – Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fl by specifying

PT
the sketch plane, reference plane, and reference direction.

Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form
a closed loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a
r
specifi sketching plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular

Fo
to the pull direction. However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the

pull direction, so if the boundary is created on a plane that is not normal
to the pull direction, you may not get the expected result.
• Draft Angle – Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the
draft angle option drafts the Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by
the specifie draft angle value. Specifying a draft angle is optional.
• ShutOff Plane – Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the
shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension extends
to. The shutoff plane is optional for a shadow surface, but it is a required
reference if a shutoff extension is define .
• Shadow Slides – Enables you to specify mold volumes to attach to the
reference model. The resulting shadow surface drapes over the specifie
mold volumes. Like the reference model, the mold volume must be fully
drafted to successfully create the shadow surface.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shadow Surface
Mold\Shadow-Surface SHADOW-SURF.ASM
Task 1: Create a shadow surface.

Volume group.
y
3. Click the Surfacing group
nl
O
Shadow Surface.
4. Select SHADOW-SURF_WRK.
se
PRT as the Boundary Reference.
5. Click OK from the Shadow
U
Surface dialog box.
al
group.
rn

SHADOW-SURF.PRT,
te
press CTRL, and select

SHADOW-SURF_WRK.PRT.
In
8. Right-click and select Hide .

C
9. Select the shadow surface.

10. Select the shadow surface quilt.
PT
11. Notice that the mold volume

does not influenc the resulting
shadow surface.
r
Fo
Task 2: Specify a shadow slide.

Shadow Surface and select
Edit Definition .
2. In the Shadow Surface dialog
box, double-click Shadow
Slides.
3. Click Volume Sel from the menu
manager and select the mold
volume.

menu manager.
5. Click OK from the Shadow
Surface dialog box.
Extrude 1 and select Hide .
7. Notice that the shadow surface
was also draped over the top of
the mold volume.
y
8. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .
nl
9. Double-click Shadow Slides.
10. Click Volume Sel > Remove All > Confirm > Done/Return from
O
the menu manager.
11. Click OK.
Task 3: Specify a shutoff extension. se

U
1. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .
al
2. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.

rn
3. Click ShutOff Dist from the menu manager, type 1 as the silhouette
edges offset, and press ENTER.
te

In
box, double-click ShutOff Plane.

5. Select datum plane SHUTOFF
C

6. Click Done/Return.
PT
7. Click Preview.
8. Click Repaint from the In
r
Graphics toolbar.
Fo

box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
10. Click Boundary > Select > One
By One from the menu manager.
11. Query-select the entire
SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch
manager.

box, double-click Draft Angle.
• Type 4 as the value and press
ENTER.
• Click OK.
Task 4: Specify a clip plane.
y
nl
1. Right-click Shadow Surface and
select Edit Definition .
O
box, double-click Clip Plane.
CLIP_PLANE in the model se
U
tree.
al

menu manager.
rn
5. Click OK.
te

SHADOW-SURF.PRT and
In
select Unhide .
7. Spin the model and observe
C
the shadow surface from the

underside.
r PT

Fo

Creating a Parting Surface Manually
You can create the parting surface manually in circumstances
where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape.
• You can use a combination of
manual parting surface and skirt
surface techniques.
• To manually create a parting
surface:
– Start the Parting Surface tool.
– Create all surface features for
y
a given loop.
nl
– Merge the surfaces together. Figure 1 – Mold Model Before
O
– Complete the parting surface. Manual Parting Surfaces Created
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Manual Parting Surface Figure 3 – Skirt Surface Used to

Created Generate Other Parting Surface
te
In
Creating a Parting Surface Manually

Sometimes the silhouette curve and skirt surface features do not provide
C
you the desired parting surface shape. You can create the parting surface
manually in these types of circumstances. You may also use a combination
PT
of a skirt surface and manual parting surface for a mold model. The skirt
surface can be used for the parting surface in the locations where the proper
geometry has been created, and a manual parting surface can be created in
r
areas where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape.
Fo
To create a parting surface manually, you can click Parting Surface from
the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group and then use the various basic
and advanced surface creation techniques. Each of the surfaces created
belongs to the parting surface feature. You can also use the various editing
and manipulation tools on the surfaces.
After all surfaces have been created for a given loop area in the mold model,
you must use Merge to merge the surfaces together before completing
the parting surface feature.
In Figure 2, a total of three surfaces were created to close the loop and create
the parting surface. Two surfaces are fil surfaces, and the third surface is an
extruded surface. Once all three surfaces were created they were merged
together. At this point the silhouette curve could be used to create the outer
loop of the parting surface and to fil the hole shutoff in the boss.

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces
A saddle shutoff typically requires you to create multiple
surfaces to achieve the desired shape.
• Create the surfaces.

• Perform surface manipulations.
• Merge the surfaces to create the
fina shutoff.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Saddle Surface Created
O
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Face Surfaces Created Figure 3 – Final Saddle Shutoff

In
Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces

C
To handle a saddle shutoff within the part, you must create the surfaces which
represent the shutoff faces. A saddle shutoff is a bit more challenging than
PT
the parting line surface or a face shutoff because you generally need several
surfaces to form the required shape. Typically, you create the saddle surface
and then create the face surfaces.
r
Fo
You can extrude or revolve the surfaces, or use more advanced geometry
creation methods like blended surfaces, depending on the desired geometry.
You can even copy existing surfaces and paste them. You can then
manipulate these surfaces by extending, trimming, and offsetting them if
needed.
Once the saddle surface and face surfaces have been created, you must
merge the surfaces together to form the required shape.
To create surfaces for saddle shutoffs, it is beneficia to use existing

geometry edges and surfaces as references for your surfaces.
However, remember that if you use existing geometry, your surfaces
become dependent on that geometry.

PROCEDURE - Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces
Mold\Surface_Saddle-ShutOff SADDLE-SHUTOFF.ASM
Task 1: Complete the saddle shutoff surface in the mold model.

Display types: .
2. Select SADDLE-SHUTOFF_
WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe.
U
al

Volume group.
rn

te
Controls group.
• Edit the Name to
In
SADDLE_SHUTOFF and
press ENTER.
C

PT
Shapes group.
Internal Sketch.
r

Fo
MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch

Plane.
11. In the Sketch dialog box, select
Top as the Orientation and click
Sketch.
menu.

Sketching group, select the
seven edges, and click Close
from the Type dialog box.
menu.
17. Click OK .
y
nl
Orientation.
O
to Symmetric .
se
U
Complete Feature .
al

rn
MOLD_FRONT as the Sketch

Plane.
te
21. Click Extrude .

In
22. Click Sketch View .

23. Click Hidden Line .
C
PT

Setup group and select the right,
r
angled silhouette surface.

Fo

dialog box.

the line on the angled reference,
starting at the horizontal
reference and stopping above
the saddle surface.
27. Click Shading .
28. Click OK .

Orientation.
to Symmetric .
Complete Feature .
y
nl
31. Select the quilt you just extruded.
O
Mirror .
MOLD_RIGHT and click se
U
Complete Feature from the
dashboard.
al
rn
te

In
35. Edit the selection filte to Quilts.

C
36. Select the saddle quilt, press

CTRL, and select the right face
PT
quilt.
37. Click Merge from the Editing
group.
r
Fo

First Quilt Side and Change
Second Quilt Side as
necessary until you get the
correct fina geometry.

39. Select the saddle quilt, press
CTRL, and select the left face
quilt.
40. Click Merge .
First Quilt Side and Change
Second Quilt Side as
necessary until you get the
correct fina geometry.
y
nl
O
group.
43. Spin the model and inspect the
saddle surface
se
U
al
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Fill Surfaces
During parting surface creation, you can fill a sketch to create
a planar surface.
• Sketch rules:
– Must use a sketched curve.
♦ Can be internal or external.
– Must be closed.
– Can be any shape.
– Can reference other geometry.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating a Fill Surface
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Creating a Second Figure 3 – Final Parting

In
Filled Surface Surface Created

C
Creating Fill Surfaces

PT
During parting surface creation, you can fil a sketch to create a planar
surface. You can either select the sketch firs and then start the Fill tool, or
start the Fill tool and then select the sketch. If you select the sketch firs and
then start the Fill tool, the feature is automatically completed.
r
Fo
The following are important points about the sketches used by the Fill tool:
• The sketch must be a sketched curve, and it can be either an internal or
external sketch.
• The sketch must be closed. However, it can contain multiple loops.
• The sketch can be any shape. That is, it can contain either tangent or
non-tangent entities.
• The sketch may reference other geometry.
Because you are using the Fill tool to fil gaps in the reference model during
parting surface creation, you will often be referencing other geometry,
whether edges or surfaces of the reference model or workpiece, or edges
of other parting surfaces. Usually the resulting planar surface is part of a
larger parting surface, and thus the fille surface must be merged with the
other portions of the parting surface.

PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Surfaces
Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill FILL-SURFACE.ASM
Task 1: Create a fille surface for a parting surface.

2. Notice that there is no parting
surface created for the square
hole to the left.
y
nl
Skirt Surface id 518 and select
.
O
Hide
se
U
al
Volume group.
rn
5. Click Fill from the Surfacing

group.
te

Internal Sketch.
In
7. Zoom in and select the surface

shown as the Sketch Plane.
C

PT
MOLD_FRONT as the Reference

and click Sketch.

r
Fo
Setup group and select the fiv

surfaces as references.
dialog box.

the eight lines.
13. Click OK .
Task 2: Create a second fille surface for a parting surface.
y
nl
1. Press ALT and select the surface
shown as the Sketch Plane.
O
2. Click Fill .
se
U
al
rn

te
Sketching group.
In
4. Select the three edges of the

other fille surface, the two
straight edges of the hole, and
C
the two curved edges of the hole.

PT
5. Click OK and click Complete

Feature .
r

Fo

Task 3: Create an extrude feature and merge the three surfaces together.

Shapes group.
2. Select the second created fil
surface.
3. Click Project and select
the three edges of the second
created fil surface.
• Click Close.
y
4. Click OK .
nl
5. Edit the depth to To Selected
O
and select the firs fille surface.
se
6. Click Complete Feature . U
al
rn
7. Edit the selection filte to Quilts.

te
8. Select the top fla quilt, press

CTRL, and select the extruded
In
quilt.
9. Click Merge from the Editing
C
group.
PT

smaller fille surface.
r
Fo

group.

Extending Curves
You can select curves or edge chains on the reference model to
extend and create a parting surface.
• Extension Directions:
– Normal to the Pull Direction
♦ Perpendicular to reference
model
♦ Perpendicular to boundary
– Parallel to the Pull Direction
y
– Tangent to the Model Figure 1 – Extending Curves
nl
– User Define Direction Normal to Pull Direction
O
• Shut Off types:
– Boundary
se
– Distance
– To a Reference
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Extending Curves Figure 3 – Adding a Distance

Tangent to the Model Shut Off
C
Extending Curves
PT
You can select curves or edge chains on the reference model to extend and
create a parting surface. You must specify the reference model so that the
system can identify which curves are available for selection. You must also
r
specify the boundary reference (usually the workpiece) to instruct the system
Fo
on how far to extend the specifie curves.

The following extension directions are available for the selected curves:
• Normal to the Pull Direction – All specifie curves are extended normal to
the pull direction. There are two additional options you can select from
when curves extend normal to the pull direction:
– Perpendicular to reference model – The specifie curves extend normal
to the pull direction and perpendicular to the adjacent reference model
surfaces.
– Perpendicular to boundary – The specifie curves extend normal to the
pull direction and perpendicular to the surfaces of the define boundary
reference model (usually the workpiece).
• Parallel to the Pull Direction – All specifie curves are extended parallel
to the pull direction.

• Tangent to the Model – All specifie curves are extended tangent to the
adjacent reference model surfaces.
• Under Define Direction – All specifie curves extend normal to the
direction reference you specify.
Optionally, you can enable the system to create surface transitions across
gaps in the extended edges.
You can also defin multiple extensions for a given operation. You can defin
one set of edges to be extended in a specifi direction and defin a different
set of edges to be extended in a different direction.
Shut Off Types
y
When extending edges, you can choose to add a shut off if desired within the
nl
Shut Off tab of the dashboard. The following shut off types are available:
• Boundary – The default type, the Boundary type extends the edges in the
O
specifie direction, out to the define boundary reference model.
• Distance – Enables you to specify a distance outward that the curves
se
extend from the reference model before they stop and extend in the pull
direction. With the Distance shut off type, you can also specify a Shut Off
U
Plane. Rather than extending the curves in the pull direction out to the
workpiece boundary, the curves instead stop at the define shut off plane
al
reference. Additionally, you can draft the surfaces extended in the pull
direction by specifying a draft angle.
rn
• To a Reference – Enables you to specify a sketch that the curves extend

from the reference model before they stop and extend in the pull direction.
te
With the To a Reference type, you can also specify a Shut Off Plane.
Rather than extending the curves in the pull direction out to the workpiece
In
boundary, the curves instead stop at the define shut off plane reference.
Additionally, you can draft the surfaces extended in the pull direction by
specifying a draft angle.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Extending Curves
Mold\Parting-Surface_Extend-Curve EXTEND-CURVE.ASM
Task 1: Extend selected reference model curves.

EXTEND-CURVE_WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
se
U
al
Volume group.
rn
7. Click Extend Curve from the

Surfacing group.
te
8. Press CTRL and select the fiv

outer bottom edges.
In
9. In the dashboard, select the References tab.

C
10. Notice that the reference model is automatically defined as is the

boundary reference.
r PT
Fo
11. In the dashboard, notice that the Direction is Normal to the Pull
Direction.
The fiv selected curves extend normal to the pull direction until
they intersect the boundary.

12. Select Parallel to the Pull
Direction from the Direction
drop-down list.
The fiv selected curves
extend parallel to the pull
direction until they intersect
the boundary.
13. Select Tangent to the Model

from the Direction drop-down list.
y
The fiv selected curves
nl
extend tangent to the model
until they intersect the
O
boundary.
14. Select Normal to the Pull

Direction.
15. Press CTRL and select the top se
U
outer edge of the notch.
16. Press CTRL and select the left
al
and right outer notch edges.

rn
17. Notice that the edges extend in

the wrong directions.
te
In
C

PT
Extensions tab.
• Select Perpendicular to
boundary as the Extension.
r
19. Notice that all selected

Fo
references extend out to

the workpiece boundary,
perpendicular to the workpiece
surfaces.
Create Transitions check box.
21. Notice that the gaps between
the extended edges are
automatically fille with transition
surfaces.

22. Select Perpendicular to reference model as the Extension.
23. In the Extensions tab, scroll the Chain collector to the bottom.
24. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.
25. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.
Task 2: Add a new extend direction.
1. In the Extensions tab, click *New

Extension.
2. Press CTRL and select the two
y
vertical outer edges of the notch.
nl
O
se
U
3. Select User Defined Direction
from the Direction drop-down list.
al
4. Select the right, vertical

workpiece surface.
rn
te
In

C
PT

group.
r
Fo
Task 3: Experiment with the various extension shutoff options.
1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Unhide .

2. Right-click Extend Curve 1 and select Edit Definition .
3. In the dashboard, select the Shut Off tab.
4. Notice that the currently define shut off Type is Boundary.

5. Select Distance from the Type
drop-down list.
6. Edit the Distance value to 10.
7. Select datum plane SHUTOFF
as the Shut Off Plane reference.
8. Edit the Draft Angle value to 3.
9. Edit the Draft Angle value back
y
to 0.
nl
10. Select To a Reference from the
Type drop-down list.
O
11. Query-select the entire Sketch
1 sketch.
se
U
12. Right-click and select Shut Off
al
Plane to activate the collector.

13. Select the bottom workpiece
rn
surface.
te

In
C

r PT
Fo

Filling Loops
You can use the Fill Loops tool to manually specify the reference
chain that forms the loop to be filled.
• Loop types include:
– Surface.
– Fit a mid-plane.
– Fit a mid-plane automatically.
– Fit a mid-surface.
– Extend to plane.
– Extend to surface.
y
nl
• Specify an offset value for the
mid-plane types.
O
Figure 1 – Surface Loop Type
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 3 – Fit a Mid-Plane

In
Figure 2 – Fit a Mid-Plane Loop Type Automatically Loop Type

C
Filling Loops
PT
You must fil any closed loops in the reference model with a surface that acts
as the parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Fill Loops tool
to manually specify the reference chain that forms the loop to be fille .
r
The following types of fil loop surfaces can be created:

Fo
• Surface – The system fill in the specifie loop with a surface. Depending
on the surrounding contours, the resulting surface may not suffic for a
parting surface.
• Fit a mid-plane – The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of
the selected loop references. The surface is created parallel to the surface
or datum plane you specify. The shape of this surface is based on the loop
shape. You can also specify an offset from the references.
• Fit a mid-plane automatically – The system creates a planar surface at the
midpoint of the selected loop references, normal to the pull direction. You
can specify an offset from the references.
• Fit a mid-surface – The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of
the selected loop references. The surface is created through the selected
surface. The selected surface does not need to be planar. You can specify
an offset from the references.

• Extend to plane – The system extends the selected loop reference edges
up to the selected planar surface and caps the end.
• Extend to surface – The system extends the selected loop reference edges
up to the selected surface and caps the end. The capped end shape takes
on that of the selected surface, which does not need to be planar.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Filling Loops
Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill-Loops LOOPS.ASM
Task 1: Experiment with the different options available for fillin loops.

Display types: .
LOOPS_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
se
Wireframe.
U
al

rn
Volume group.
7. Click Fill Loops from the
te
Surfacing group.
In
8. Zoom in to the top of the model.

9. Select the edge shown.
C
PT
10. Press SHIFT and select the other

three tangent edges.
11. In the dashboard, notice that the
r
Type is Surface.
Fo
12. Notice the resulting preview

surface.
13. In the dashboard, edit the Type

to Fit a mid-plane.
14. Select datum plane EXTEND.

Closures tab.
• Edit the Offset to 8.
16. Select Fit a mid-plane

automatically from the Type
drop-down list.
17. Notice that the resulting plane is
y
normal to the pull direction.
nl
O
18. Select Fit a mid-surface from
the Type drop-down list.
19. Select the top surface of the
reference model.
se
U
al
20. Select Extend to plane from the

rn
Type drop-down list.

te
In
C
21. Select the bottom surface of

the reference model as the new
PT
plane reference.
r
Fo
22. Select Extend to surface from

the Type drop-down list.
from the dashboard.
group.

Creating Shut Offs
You can use the Shut Off tool to fill both open and closed holes
in the reference model.
• To create a shut off:

– Specify the reference
surfaces.
– Select the shut off loops.
• Close all internal loops.
– Optionally exclude loops.
y
• Cap open loops.
nl
– The surface must pass
through the ends of the
O
open loop. Figure 1 – Creating a Shut Off
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Closing All

Internal Loops Figure 3 – Capping an Open Loop
C
PT
Creating Shut Offs

You must fil any loops in the reference model with a surface that acts as the
parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Shut Off to fil both
r
open and closed holes in the reference model.

Fo
To create the shut off, you must specify the following:

• Reference Surfaces – Specifie the surfaces that defin the perimeter of
the loops you wish to close.
• Shut Off Loops – Enables you to select the edges of the specifie reference
surfaces that defin the desired loop.
Closing All Internal Loops

You can select the Close all internal loops check box to automatically fil all
closed holes within the selected reference surfaces. When this option is
selected, it is not necessary to select the shut off loop edges.
If desired, you can also exclude individual holes from the shut off operation.

Capping Open Loops
The Shut Off tool enables you to also fil open loops in the reference model
by specifying a cap surface. The cap surface closes the open loop so that
it can be fille with the parting surface. The specifie cap surface(s) must
pass through the ends of the open loop. If a surface is not available, you can
create a datum plane to defin the cap surface.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Shut Offs
Mold\Parting-Surface_Shut-Off SHUT-OFF.ASM
Task 1: Create shut offs by closing all internal loops.

Volume group.
y
nl
3. Click Shut Off from the
Surfacing group.
O
Close all internal loops check
box. se
U
5. Select the surface shown.
6. Notice that all three internal loops
al
within the surface are closed.

rn

te
rounded surface.
In
8. Again, notice that all internal

loops within the surface are
closed.
C
r PT
Fo

References tab.
• Click in the Exclude Loops
collector to activate it.
• Select an edge on the leftmost
hole, press SHIFT, and select
the three adjacent edges.

12. Notice that the one hole has
been excluded.
y
nl
13. Click Shut Off .
O
14. Select the Close all internal
loops check box.
se
15. Zoom in on the top, leftmost hole.
U
surfaces.
al
surfaces on each of the four

other similar holes.
rn

te
and click in the background to

In
C
PT
19. Orient to the 3D2 view

orientation.
r
20. Click Shut Off .

Fo
21. Select the Close all internal

loops check box.
surfaces.
group.

Task 2: Create shut offs by specifying loops.

orientation.
2. Click Parting Surface and
click Shut Off .
3. Press CTRL and select the fiv
surfaces.
y
nl
Loops.
5. Select an edge, press SHIFT,
O
and select the nine adjacent
edges to create the loop.
se
U
al
6. Right-click and select Reference

rn
Surfaces.
7. Press CTRL and select the same
te
fiv surfaces on the second tab

location, spinning the model as
In
necessary.
C
PT

r
Loops.
Fo
9. Press CTRL and select an edge.

10. Press SHIFT and select the nine
adjacent edges to create the
second loop.

11. Repeat the process to create the
shut off for the third tab.
click OK .
y
Task 3: Create a shut off by capping the open loops.
nl
O
orientation.
2. Click Parting Surface and
click Shut Off .
3. Select the surface shown as the se
U
reference surface.
al
rn

te
Loops.
In
5. Select an edge, press SHIFT,

and select the fiv adjacent
edges.
C
r PT
Fo
6. Right-click and select Cap

Surfaces.
7. In the dashboard, click Datum
and select Plane .
8. Select the surface as the Offset
reference.
9. Click OK from the Datum Plane
dialog box.

10. In the dashboard, click Resume
Feature .
11. Notice that the parting surface
is shut off at the newly created
datum plane.
y
Loops.
nl
13. Press CTRL and select an edge
on the other loop.
O
14. Press SHIFT and select the
same fiv adjacent edges to
complete the second loop.
se
U
click OK .
al

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11
y
Splitting Mold Volumes
nl
O
Module Overview
se
After the necessary mold volumes and parting surfaces have been created,
you must split the workpiece and mold volumes at the parting surface into
the fina core, cavity, and slider volumes, as well as any other volumes that
U
are to become mold components in the fina mold.
al
In this module, you learn how to split the workpiece and mold volumes, as
well as how to blank and unblank mold items in the mold model.
rn
Objectives
te

In
• Split the workpiece.

• Split mold volumes.
C
• Split volumes using multiple parting surfaces.

• Blank and unblank mold items.
PT
• Use split classificatio to generate resulting mold volumes.

r
Fo

Splitting the Workpiece
You can split the workpiece by using a parting surface or mold
volume to create the core and cavity volumes of the mold model.
• Split the workpiece using the All

Wrkpcs split option.
• A new mold volume is created
equal to the workpiece volume.
– Reference model geometry
subtracted.
y
• The volume is split into one or two
nl
volumes.
– Use a parting surface or other
O
volume.
Parting Surface
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Split Mold Model Figure 3 – Split Mold Model

C
Core Volume Cavity Volume

PT
Splitting the Workpiece

You can split or divide the workpiece with the All Wrkpcs split option by using
r
a parting surface or a mold volume. When the workpiece split is performed,

Fo
Creo Parametric calculates the total volume of the workpiece and creates
a mold volume from it. The system then subtracts, or trims, the reference
model geometry and any mold features such as gates, runners, and sprues
from the workpiece volume and creates a Refpart Cutout feature in the model
tree (this Refpart Cutout feature displays in the model tree differently than a
reference part cutout operation that is performed on a mold volume).
The remaining mold volume is then split at the specifie parting surface or
mold volume. The system trims the amount of workpiece volume to one side
of the parting surface or mold volume and turns that volume into its own
mold volume. If applicable, the system also trims the amount of workpiece
volume on the other side of the parting surface or mold volume and turns
that volume into its own mold volume. A simple mold model containing only
a core and cavity is a typical example. One of the mold volumes becomes
the core, and the other the cavity.

One Volume or Two?
For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold
volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options :
• Two Volumes — Splits the workpiece into two mold volumes.
• One Volume — Splits the workpiece into a single mold volume, discarding
the other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in
the mold volume. You can do this using the Island List. The Island List
enables you to select which portion to include in the new volume. When
you cursor over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights
blue in the graphics window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to
y
name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading
it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold
nl
volume with the name you specify.
O
Workpiece Splitting Guidelines
se
Consider the following guidelines when splitting the workpiece:
• A split operation in a mold model using the All Wrkpcs option is typically
U
only performed one time.
• Splitting a workpiece does not modify its geometry. Whenever a workpiece
al
is split, the system copies the volume occupied by the workpiece and
creates a mold volume from it.
rn
• If you split a workpiece by a parting surface, the system modifie the

existing volume. That is, a volume is split and either one or two volumes
te
are created in place of the original volume.

In
• Splitting the workpiece with parting surfaces ensures that these solid mold
components add up to the desired volume, with no extra or missing pieces.
• If you split the workpiece by a parting surface, the parting surface must
C
completely intersect the workpiece.

PT
• If you split a workpiece by another volume, the original volumes are not
modifie . Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For
example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold
r
volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes
Fo
after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of
the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you
end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and
new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B.
Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the
number of mold volume features down in the model tree.
• Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you
determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later
on. For example, if the mold volume will become the core mold component,
name it “core_vol”.

PROCEDURE - Splitting the Workpiece
Mold\Split-Workpiece SPLIT-WORKPIECE.ASM
Task 1: Split the mold model workpiece into volumes.

2. Select the SPLIT-WORKPIECE_
WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface. se
U
al

rn
list in the Parting Surface & Mold

Volume group.
te

In
manager.
9. Notice that the workpiece has
C
been fille with a mold volume.

r PT
10. Select the parting surface from

Fo

box.

box.
13. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade.
• Notice that the volume will be
the core of the mold.
• Type CORE_VOL and press
ENTER.
y
nl
Shade.
O
15. Orient to the 3D view orientation
and notice that this volume will
be the cavity of the mold.
16. In the Properties dialog box,
type CAVITY_VOL and press se
U
ENTER.
al
rn
te

Orientation.
In
18. In the model tree, notice the

Refpart Cutout feature.
C
19. Also notice the two mold

volumes that were created, and
PT
their names.

r
Fo

You can also split existing mold volumes to create volumes for
sliders, lifters, inserts, and so on.
• Split mold volumes using the Mold
Volume split option.
– Specify the volume to be split in
the Search Tool.
• The specifie volume is split into
one or two volumes.
– Use a parting surface or other
y
volume.
nl
Slider Volumes
O
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Core Volume Before it Figure 3 – Core Volume After

In
is Split for Slider Volumes Splits for Slider Volumes

C

PT
You can split an existing mold volume in a mold model using the Mold
Volume split option. This option is only available if the workpiece has already
been split, or if you have sketched a mold volume slider, insert, or lifter, for
example. Unlike the All Wrkpces option, when a mold volume is split, the
r
system does not create a reference part cutout in the model tree.
Fo
When you specify the Mold Volume option, the system uses the Search Tool
to perform a search for all quilts (mold volumes) in the mold model. You
must specify the desired quilt (mold volume) to be split from the list of results
found. You should not modify the parameters of the Search Tool to obtain
different results.
A mold model containing sliders, inserts, or lifters needs to undergo multiple
split operations because multiple mold components will be created from the
mold model.
One Volume or Two?

For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold
volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options:
• Two Volumes — Splits the mold volume into two mold volumes.

• One Volume — Splits the mold volume into a single mold volume,
“discarding” the other portion. You must specify which portion you want
included in the mold volume. This is done using the Island List. The Island
List enables you to select which portion is to be included in the new volume.
When you hover over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry
highlights blue in the graphics window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to
name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading
it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold
volume with the name you specify.
Creating Intermediate Mold Volumes
y
Depending on the mold model and its complexity, not every mold volume
nl
created will be used to create a fina solid mold component. It may be
necessary to create “intermediate”, or temporary mold volumes during
O
splitting operations. For example, if you split the workpiece into the core and
cavity volumes, but the core volume must further be split to remove a slider
volume, you create an intermediate core volume.
Mold Volume Splitting Guidelines se

U
Consider the following guidelines when splitting mold volumes:
al
• When you split a volume by a parting surface, the volume is split at the
parting surface and either one or two volumes are created in place of the
rn
original volume.
• When you split a volume by another volume, the original volumes are not
te
modifie . Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For
example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold
In
volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes
after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of
C
the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
PT
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you
end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and
new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B.
r
Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the
Fo
number of mold volume features down in the model tree.

• When you split the mold volume by a parting surface, the parting surface
must completely intersect the mold volume.
• Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you
determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later
on. For example, if a mold volume is used as an intermediate mold volume,
name it “temp_mold_vol1”, or something similar so you know later on that it
will not be used to create a solid mold component.

PROCEDURE - Splitting Mold Volumes
Mold\Split-Volumes SPLIT-VOLUMES.ASM
Task 1: Split the workpiece and mold volumes of a mold model.

2. Select the SPLIT-VOLUMES_
WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface se
U
and the two slider mold volumes
in the graphics window and
al
model tree.
rn

te

Volume group.
In

C
manager.
PT
9. Notice that the workpiece has

been fille with a mold volume.
r
the graphics window and click

Fo
OK from the Select dialog box.

box.
Shade.
13. Click Wireframe from the In
Graphics toolbar.
14. Notice that the volume will be the
core of the mold, but that it has
not taken the slider volumes into
account.
y
15. In the Properties dialog box type
TEMP-CORE_VOL1 and press
nl
ENTER.
O
Shade.
this volume will be the cavity of
se
U
the mold.
al
type CAVITY_VOL and press

ENTER.
rn

Orientation.
te
20. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT ID 7286 [CAVITY_VOL-MOLD

In
VOLUME] and select Hide .

C
21. Click Volume Split and click One Volume > Mold Volume >
Done from the menu manager.
PT
22. In the Search Tool dialog box,

select the TEMP-CORE_VOL1
quilt and click Add Item .
r
Fo
• Click Close.
23. Query-select the front slider
volume and click OK from the
Select dialog box.

24. In the menu manager, select the
Island 1 check box and click
Done Sel.
box.

click Shade and notice the slider
volume has been trimmed from
y
the temporary core volume.
nl
• Type TEMP-CORE_VOL2 and
press ENTER.
O
27. Click Volume Split and click se
U
One Volume > Mold Volume >
Done.
al

select the TEMP-CORE_VOL2
rn
quilt and click Add Item .

• Click Close.
te
29. Query-select the rear slider

In
volume and click OK from the

Select dialog box.
C

Island 1 check box and click
PT
Done Sel.
box.
r
Fo

Shade and notice that the slider
volume has been trimmed from
the fina core volume.
• Type CORE_VOL and press
ENTER.

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces
You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or
mold volume.
• You can use multiple parting

surfaces in a single split operation.
• You can use multiple parting
surfaces in multiple split
operations.
y
Figure 1 – Model Tree Containing
Two Parting Surfaces
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Selecting Multiple Figure 3 – Viewing Multiple

rn
Parting Surfaces Parting Surfaces

te
Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces

In
You can use multiple parting surfaces to split volumes in two different ways:
• You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or mold volume
C
into multiple mold volumes. You can use one parting surface for one
PT
split operation, and specify a different parting surface for a second split
operation. Of course you must also specify the workpiece or mold volume
to split and the names of the firs and, if applicable, second volumes.
r
• Sometimes the shape of the reference model and the parting surfaces
Fo
created require that you specify more than one parting surface during a
single split operation. In these circumstances, you can press CTRL in
order to select multiple parting surfaces. You can also select multiple mold
volumes to split a workpiece or mold volume in a split operation.

PROCEDURE - Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting
Surfaces
Mold\Split-Volumes_Multiple MULT-SURF1.ASM
Task 1: Split a volume using multiple parting surfaces in one split.

2. Select the MULT-SURF1_WRK.PRT.
y
nl
O
6. Notice that there are two parting surfaces, SKIRT_PART-SURF and
MANUAL_PART-SURF.
se
U
al

Volume group.
rn

te
manager.
In
9. Press CTRL, select the two

parting surfaces, and click OK
C

PT
box.
Shade, type CORE_VOL, and
r
press ENTER.
Fo

Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and
press ENTER.

Task 2: Split volumes with multiple parting surfaces in two split operations.
1. Click Open and double-click MULT-SURF2.ASM.

2. Select the MULT-SURF2_WRK.PRT.
6. Notice the two parting surfaces MAIN_PART_SURF and
SIDE_PART_SURF.
y
nl
7. Click Volume Split .
O
se
manager.
9. Select the SIDE_PART_SURF
U
dialog box.
al

box.
rn

Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL,
te
and press ENTER.

In

C
Shade, type SLIDER_VOL, and

press ENTER.
r PT
Fo
13. Click Volume Split and click

Two Volumes > Mold Volume
> Done.
select TEMP-MOLD_VOL, click
Add Item , and click Close.
15. Query-select the
MAIN_PART_SURF and click
OK from the Select dialog box.

box.
Shade, type CORE_VOL, and
press ENTER.

Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and
press ENTER.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items
The Blank and Unblank options enable you to add or remove
mold items to the current mold model display.
• Use these options at
any time while in Mold
mode.
• You can blank and
unblank the following:
– Parting surface
– Volume
y
nl
– Component
• Use the following
O
methods:
– Blank and Unblank
se
Dialog Box
– Right-click after item
U
selection.
al
Figure 1 – Blank and Unblank Dialog Boxes

rn
Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items

te
You can blank and unblank mold items at any time during your work in
Mold mode. Blank and unblank functionality is similar to hide and unhide
In
functionality. However, unlike the hide-unhide functionality, you do not

have to save the blank-unblank status. It is retained for you automatically.
Additionally, when a mold item is comprised of multiple features, such as a
C
manually created parting surface, you can blank or unblank the entire parting
PT
surface in one operation, rather than having to hide or unhide individual

features.
The following items can be blanked and unblanked:
r
Fo
• Parting surface — Enables you to blank/unblank any parting surface

in the mold model.
• Volume — Enables you to blank/unblank any mold volume, such as
sliders, cores, and cavities.
• Component — Enables you to blank/unblank the reference model,
workpiece, or any other mold component.
You can blank and unblank mold items using the following methods:
• Click Mold Display , in the View tab, to access the Blank and Unblank
dialog box. You can also press CTRL+B to access the dialog box. The
Filter Tree in the dialog box enables you to see only the mold item types
you want to blank or unblank. You can filte by parting surfaces, volumes,
or components. If you click Parting surface , for example, you will see
only the parting surfaces available for selection in the dialog box. When

a Component filte option is activated, a series of check boxes becomes
available, enabling you to further filte the components displayed in the
Blank-Unblank dialog box. The following component items can further be
filtered
– Workpiece
– Ref Model
– Mold Component
– Mold Base Comp
– Gen Assembly
– Molding
The Blank and Unblank dialog box contains a Blank and Unblank tab.
y
Items listed in the Blank tab are those that are visible in the graphics
window but available for blanking. If you select an item and click Blank, the
nl
item is moved to the Unblank tab of the dialog box. Similarly, the Unblank
tab displays all items that are blanked in the graphics window.
O
• Select items from the model tree, then right-click and select Blank or
Unblank. If the mold item is comprised of numerous features, which can
se
occur for a mold volume or manually created parting surfaces, you must
select the firs feature to blank or unblank the item. The Blank and Unblank
U
menu selection is only available for the firs feature of the mold item.
• Select items from the graphics window, then right-click and select Blank
al
or Unblank.
rn
Blanking and Unblanking Requirements

te
Consider the following blanking and unblanking criteria for items in a mold
model:
In
• When splitting the workpiece or mold volume, the parting surface or mold
volume used to do the splitting must be unblanked.
C
• In order to split the workpiece, it must be unblanked. If the workpiece is

PT
blanked, the All Wrkpcs split option is grayed out in the menu manager.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items
Mold\Blank-Unblank BLANK-UNBLANK.ASM
Task 1: Blank and Unblank mold items using the Blank and Unblank
dialog box.

y
3. Click Mold Display from the Visibility group.
nl
You can also press CTRL+B to access the Blank and Unblank
O
dialog box.
5. In the Blank and Unblank dialog

box, select Component as se
U
the Filter if necessary.
• Press CTRL and select
al
BLANK-UNBLANK_REF and
BLANK-UNBLANK_WRK.
rn
• Click Blank.
te

In
box, select Volume as the

Filter.
C
• Select CAVITY_VOL and click

PT
Blank.
r

Fo
box, select CORE_VOL and click

Blank.

box, select Parting surface
as the Filter.
• Select MAIN_PART_SURF
and click Blank.

box, select the Unblank tab.
• Select Component as the
Filter.
• Select BLANK-UNBLANK_
REF and click Unblank.
• Click OK.
Task 2: Blank and Unblank mold items from the model tree and graphics
window.
y
nl
SLIDER_VOL and select Blank.
O
Graphics toolbar and de-select
all geometry.
3. In the graphics window select the se

U
side parting surface, right-click,
and select Blank.
al
4. Click Repaint .
rn
te

In
CORE_VOL and select Unblank.

C
6. Click Repaint and de-select

all geometry.
r PT
Fo

BLANK-UNBLANK_REF.PRT
and select Blank.

Analyzing Split Classification
The process of determining which individual closed islands of
space should be included in the resultant mold volume is called
classifying.
• An island is a closed volume of

space in the mold model.
• Specify the islands to be included
in the resultant volume.
• Classifying islands enables you
to create simpler manual parting
y
surfaces.
nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing Reference
Part Geometry
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Classifying Islands Figure 3 – Resultant Mold Volume
Analyzing Split Classification

C
When you split a volume, depending upon the shape of the workpiece, the
PT
shape of the reference model, and the shape of the parting surface, the split
may create several individual closed volumes. When you create a split using
the Two Volumes option, each of these volumes must end up as part of one
r
volume or the other. Similarly, when you create a split using the One Volume
Fo
option, each of these volumes must end up as part of the new volume, or left
to remain in the old volume.
Each one of these individual closed volumes occupies an island of space
within the mold model. You must specify which islands of space should
belong together, or be included, in the resultant mold volume. The process of
determining which islands should be included in the resultant mold volume
is called classifying.
Each of the islands displays in the menu manager Island List. When you
hover over a given island in the menu manager, its corresponding volume
of space highlights in blue in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2.
Each of the islands you select from the Island List are included together
to comprise the resultant mold volume. The islands that are not selected
either end up in the other mold volume (in the case of a Two Volumes split)
or discarded (in the case of a One Volume split).

A One Volume split always creates a situation where you must classify the
islands to be included in the resultant volume. The reason for this is that
regardless of whether you split by a parting surface or by another volume, you
must specify which side of the split you want to be included in the resultant
volume. You also must classify islands when you specify multiple parting
surfaces or mold volumes when splitting a volume.
Classifying islands in a mold model enables you to create simpler manual
parting surfaces. In Figure 1, a fla parting surface was used to create the
slider mold volume shown in Figure 3. This was done by classifying the
islands properly, as shown in Figure 2. Rather than creating a fla parting
surface, you can create a parting surface which completely conforms to the
interior of all the cuts in the reference model. You can then split the workpiece
using this more complex parting surface and not have to classify islands. The
y
parting surface would look like this:
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Split Classification
Mold\Split_Classificatio SPLIT-CLASSIFICATION.ASM
Task 1: Classify islands to split mold volumes correctly.

2. Select the SPLIT-
CLASSIFICATION_WRK.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
Wireframe.
6. Notice the three cuts in the side se
U
of the reference model.
al

SLIDER_PARTING-SURF and
rn
select Unblank.
te

In

Volume group.
C

PT
manager.
r
Fo

box.
12. In the menu manager, cursor
over Island 1 and notice the
corresponding space the island
occupies highlighted blue.
• Select the Island 1 check box.

Island 3, Island 4, and Island 5
check boxes.
• Click Done Sel.
box.
Shade and spin the model to
inspect the mold volume.
• Type SLIDER_VOL and press
ENTER.
y
nl
Orientation.
O
Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL,
se
and press ENTER. U
al
rn
18. Click Volume Split .

19. Click Two Volumes > Mold
te
Volume > Done.

20. In the Search Tool, select the
In
TEMP-MOLD_VOL quilt and

click Add Item .
C
• Click Close.
PT

CORE-CAVITY_PARTING-
SURF and select Unblank.
r
22. Query-select the parting surface

Fo

dialog box.

Island 1, Island 3, and Island
4 check boxes, and click Done
Sel.
box.
Shade and spin the model to
inspect the mold volume.
• Type CAVITY_VOL and press
ENTER.
y
nl
Orientation.
O
Shade, type CORE_VOL and
press ENTER.
se
U
al
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12
y
Mold Component Extraction
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Once the proper mold volumes have been created and split, you can now
create the mold components. You create mold components by fillin the mold
volumes with material. This process is called extracting, and it automatically
U
converts the mold volumes into fully functional solid parts.
al
In this module, you learn how to extract the fina solid mold components
from mold volumes.
rn
Objectives
te

In
• Extract mold components from mold volumes.

• Apply start models to mold components.
C
r PT
Fo

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes
You can produce mold components by filling the previously
defined mold volumes with solid material.
• Mold component features:
– Contain an Extract feature.
– Are fully-functional parts.
– Maintain a parent/child
relationship with their mold
volumes.
• Mold component color-coding:
y
– Reference model color
nl
– Blue Figure 1 – Extracted Core
O
– Orange Mold Component
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Extracted Cavity Figure 3 – Extracted Slider

Mold Component Mold Component
C
Extracting Mold Components from Volumes

PT
Once the mold volumes are created and the workpiece and mold volumes
are split, you can create the fina mold components. You can produce
mold components by fillin the previously define mold volumes with solid
r
material. This process, performed using the Cavity insert option, is

Fo
called extracting. Extracted parts can be core and cavity pieces as well as
sliders, inserts, core pins, and so on.
The system does not automatically create mold components from every
mold volume found in the mold model. Recall that you may have created
temporary mold volumes during the split process to create your desired
mold volumes. Consequently, you must specify which mold volumes will be
extracted into mold components. When the mold components are extracted
and created, the corresponding mold volumes are automatically blanked
from the graphics window.
The extracted mold components are created in the mold model, and each
component contains an Extract feature that contains the solid geometry.
The extract feature cannot be redefined but these components are fully
functional parts. You can retrieve them in Part mode, and add new features
to them. To save the extracted mold components, you must save the mold

model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current Creo Parametric
session. By default, the extracted mold components are named the same
as the volumes from which they were extracted.
Extracted mold components maintain a parent/child relationship with their
mold volumes. Therefore, the mold components automatically update when
changes are made to the mold volumes. While the mold volumes are
assembly features in the mold model, the mold components are assembly
components in the mold model.
Color-Coding of Extracted Mold Components

By default, the extracted mold components are created in the default
Creo Parametric gray color. However, the surfaces of the extracted mold
y
components may also display in three other potential colors:
nl
• Reference model color – The mold components’ surfaces that touch the
O
reference model are color-coded the same as the reference model. In the
figures the reference model color is red.
• Blue – Steel-to-steel contact between tooling component shutoffs.
se
• Orange – Steel-to-steel contact between slider mold component surfaces
and mold plates, cores, or cavities. It is important to note that only the
U
slider mold volumes created by calculating undercut boundaries, become
orange when the mold components are extracted. Sketched sliders and
al
other components have blue surfaces at their steel-to-steel contact points.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Extracting Mold Components from
Volumes
Mold\Components_Extract-Volume EXTRACT-VOLUMES.ASM
Task 1: Extract mold components from mold volumes.

y
select No Hidden from the
nl
menu and notice that the mold
O
volumes are surfaces.
se
menu.
U
al

rn

Components group.
te

dialog box, click Select All .
In
• Press CTRL and click

TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 to
C
de-select it.
PT
6. Click OK from the Create Mold

Component dialog box.
7. Notice the four new mold
r
components created in the

Fo
model tree.

menu and notice that the mold
components are solid geometry.
menu.

CORE_VOL.PRT and select
Open .
11. Notice the single Extract feature
in the model tree.
12. Spin the model to inspect it and
notice the surfaces that are blue.
13. Notice the surfaces that are
orange.
y
reference model color.
nl
Access toolbar to return to the
O
mold model.
CAVITY_VOL.PRT and select
. se
U
Open
17. Again, notice the single Extract
al
feature in the model tree.

18. Spin the model to inspect it and
rn
again notice the surfaces that

are blue.
te

reference model color.
In
20. Click Close to return to the

mold model.
C

PT
SLIDER_VOL1.PRT and select

Open .
r
22. Notice the orange surfaces.

Fo
23. Click Close to return to the

mold model.

Applying Start Models to Mold Components
You can rename extracted mold components and apply start
models to them.
• Benefit of using templates:
– Datums
– Layers
– Parameters
– View Orientations
• Because each mold component
is a part model, it should be
y
renamed accordingly.
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Extracted Mold
al
Component Model Tree Figure 2 – Renaming Mold

rn
Components and Applying

Start Model
te
Applying Start Models to Mold Components

In
You can apply an existing start model template to components when

extracting them from mold volumes in the mold model. This is done in the
Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box. As a best
C
practice, you should create extracted mold components using a start model
PT
template. Using a start model template when extracting mold components

provides you with the following benefit .
• Datums – Includes a set of default datum planes and a default coordinate
r
system
Fo
• Layers
• Parameters
• View Orientations
These are the same benefit that you gain from using a start model template
when creating new part models.
Renaming Mold Components
By default, extracted mold components are named the same as the mold
volume from which they are extracted. You can rename the mold component
name in the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box.
This section displays the specifie mold volumes that you extract. In one
column the mold volume name is displayed, and in another column the
corresponding mold component name is displayed. As a best practice you
should rename the mold components with names that are unique to the mold

and to the type of component being extracted. For example, a mold volume
named cavity_vol should have its corresponding mold component renamed
to widget_cavity, or it should be renamed according to your company's
standards. Extracted mold components are not volumes, so the “vol” suffix
should be removed. Also, mold components are part models. Therefore,
each part model should be given a unique name.
You can only rename one mold component at a time. If more than
one mold component is selected in the Advanced section of the
Create Mold Component dialog box, the field to rename mold
components become grayed out.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Applying Start Models to Mold
Components
Mold\Components_Start-Model APPLY_START-MODEL.ASM
Task 1: Rename mold components prior to extracting them.

y
nl
Components group.
O
dialog box, click Select All .
• Click Advanced to expand it.
• Notice that the mold volumes se
U
and corresponding mold
component names are the
al
same.
rn
4. In the Advanced section of

the Create Mold Component
te
dialog box, select mold volume

CAVITY_VOL.
In
• Edit the Mold Component

Name to WIDGET_CAVITY
and press ENTER.
C
• Select mold volume

PT
CORE_VOL.
Name to WIDGET_CORE and
r
press ENTER.
Fo
• Select mold volume

SLIDER_VOL.
Name to WIDGET_SLIDER
and press ENTER.

Task 2: Apply a start model to the mold components and extract them.
1. In the Advanced section of the

Create Mold Component dialog
box, click Select All .
• Click Copy From .
• In the Choose template
dialog box, double-click
MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
• Notice that the Copy From fiel
y
displays the template model
that is used.
nl
2. Click OK from the Create Mold
O
Component dialog box.
3. Notice the three newly created
se
mold components in the model
tree.
U
WIDGET_SLIDER.PRT and
al
select Open .
rn
5. In the model tree, notice the

datum features in addition to the
te
Extract feature.
In
click Saved Orientations

and select BACK.
C
PT
7. In the model tree, click Show

and select Layer Tree.
8. Notice the default layers.
r
9. Click Show and select Model

Fo
Tree.
Access toolbar to return to the
mold model.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13
y
Mold Features Creation
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn how to create assembly-level features in a mold
model for the purpose of removing material. Mold features include waterlines,
runners, ejector pin clearance holes, and gates. You can use user-define
U
features (UDFs) to defin and place waterlines, runners, and gates. You
can also run a waterlines check for clearance of waterline circuits in the
al
mold model.
rn
Objectives
te

• Create waterline circuits.
In
• Analyze waterline end conditions and understand the different types.

• Perform a waterlines check.
C
• Understand the different mold analysis settings available and learn how
PT
to save an analysis.
• Create sprues and runners.
• Create ejector pin clearance holes.
r
• Create and place UDFs in a mold model.

Fo

Creating Waterline Circuits
Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create
water channels in the mold model.
• Specify the waterline circuit
diameter.
• Sketch the waterline circuit.
– Section should contain only
linear entities.
• Specify the mold components to
be cut.
y
Figure 1 – Sketching the
nl
Waterline Circuit
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 3 – Cutaway of Waterline

Figure 2 – Completed Waterline Circuit
te
Creating Waterline Circuits

In
Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create water
channels or circuits in the mold model. Waterlines are drilled holes in the
C
mold model components. The waterline circuits convey cooling water through
the mold components to control the cooling of molten material. The speed
PT
of cooling the mold is directly related to the profitabilit of the entire mold
product line.
To create a waterline circuit, you must specify the following:
r
• Name – Determines the name of the waterline as it displays in the model

Fo
tree. You can accept the default name if desired.

• Diameter – Enables you to specify the diameter of the waterline hole. You
can either type a value or accept the default diameter value.
• Circuit – Enables you to sketch the waterline circuit path. You must specify
the sketch plane and reference plane and orientation. The sketched
section should only contain linear entities. This is because the waterline
path is ultimately drilled into the mold components. As you sketch the
circuit in Sketcher, a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line,
as shown in Figure 1. This dashed line denotes the actual section diameter
of the circuit.
• Intersected Parts – Enables you to select the mold components that
the waterline circuit intersects. The following options are available for
determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the
waterline:

– Automatic update – When this check box is selected, the system
automatically determines which mold components are cut by the
waterline feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When
this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference
models and any molding.
– Advanced intersection – When this check box is selected, the system
enables you to manually defin the display level separately for each
component.
– Select a component to intersect – Enables you to manually specify
which components are cut by the waterline feature.
– AutoAdd – Similar to the Automatic Update check box, when this
option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold
components are cut by the waterline feature.
y
nl
– Info – Enables you to display information regarding the waterlines
feature in the browser.
O
The mold components that are specifie display in the Intersected
Components dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can
se
select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select
Remove.
By default, even though the waterline is created as an assembly feature,
U
you can also view it within the individual mold component. The feature
displays in the mold component model tree as an assembly cut. You
al
can modify this behavior, however. The right column of the Intersected
Components dialog box displays the visibility level for each intersected
rn
component which, by default, is the mold component itself. You can click in
this fiel and modify the visibility level of the component to the mold model
te
assembly. When this change is made the waterline is only visible from
within the mold model, and not within the individual mold component.
In
Because waterlines are actually drilled holes in the mold components, the
end of each waterline segment displays as a drill point, rather than a fla
C
or rounded edge.
PT
You can create waterlines any time after the workpiece and reference
model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created
waterlines are automatically subtracted from the mold volumes along with
r

Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Waterline Circuits
Mold\Waterlines WATERLINES.ASM
Task 1: Create a basic waterline circuit in a mold model.

Display types:
2. Click Water Line from the
y
nl
3. Type 8 as the diameter of the
waterline circuit and press
O
ENTER.
4. Select datum plane WLINE as
se
the waterline sketching plane
and click Default from the menu
manager.
U
al
rn

Setup group and select the
te
bottom of the mold component.

In
• Click Close.
C
.
PT

the three lines.
r
9. Middle-click twice and edit the

Fo
dimensions, as shown.
10. Click OK .

Orientation.
13. In the Intersected Components
dialog box, select the Automatic
update check box.
• Click OK.
14. Click OK from the Water Line
dialog box.
15. Notice the waterline feature in
y
the model tree.
nl
16. At the top of the model tree, click
O
Settings and select Tree
Filters .
• In the Model Tree Items dialog
box, select the Suppressed
se
U
objects check box and click
OK.
al
17. In the model tree, right-click CUT

and select Resume.
rn
18. De-select all geometry and zoom

in on the waterline.
te
19. Right-click WATERLINE_1 and

In
select Edit .
20. Edit the diameter from 8 to 10
C
and click Regenerate .

r PT
Fo
21. Right-click WLINE_CAVITY.PRT

and select Open .
22. Notice the assembly cuts in the
model tree.
One of the assembly cuts
is for the cutaway, and the
other is for the waterline.

Access toolbar.

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions
You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit
segment endpoints.
• The following end conditions can
be applied:
– None
– Blind
– Thru
– Thru w/Cbore
y
Figure 1 – Blind Waterline End
nl
Condition
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Thru w/Cbore Waterline Figure 3 – Thru Waterline End

End Condition Condition
te
Analyzing Waterline End Conditions

In
You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit segment
endpoints. You can apply end conditions to ensure the circuit is capable of
C
being manufactured. You can apply the following end conditions:

• None – Causes a standard, blind end to be created on the end. By default,
PT
each waterline circuit end has this option specifie .

• Blind – Enables you to specify an extra drilled blind end. You can extend
the drilled end a specifie distance beyond the endpoint.
r
Fo
• Thru – Enables you to create a straight hole end condition. The system
extends the drilled end out through all mold model geometry.
• Thru w/Cbore – Enables you to create a counterbore hole end condition.
Similar to the Thru option, the system extends the drilled end out through all
mold model geometry. However, the system also places a counterbore at
the entrance to the mold geometry. You can specify both the counterbore
diameter and depth.
In order to defin a waterline circuit end condition, you must specify the ends
to which you want to apply end conditions. Rather than selecting a segment
endpoint vertex, you should select the segment itself near the end to which
you want to apply the end condition. If the endpoint you want to apply the
condition to is the intersection of two segments, the system determines which
segment endpoint to apply the end condition to based on the segment you
select. You can press CTRL and select multiple waterline circuit endpoints
in order to have the same end condition applied.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Waterline End Conditions
Mold\Waterlines_End END-CONDITIONS.ASM
Task 1: Add various end conditions to a waterline in a mold model.

2. Edit the definitio of
WATERLINE_1.
3. In the Water Line dialog box,
y
double-click End Condition.
nl
4. Select the front end of the left
waterline segment and click OK
O
se
5. In the menu manager, click Thru
w/Cbore > Done/Return.
U
6. Type 12 for the counterbore
diameter and press ENTER.
al
7. Type 15 for the counterbore

depth and press ENTER.
rn
te
8. Select the left side of the rear

In

C
r PT
Fo
9. In the menu manager, click Blind

> Done/Return.
10. Type 8 as the value to extend the
left side and press ENTER.

11. Select the right side of the rear
12. In the menu manager, click Thru

> Done/Return.
y
nl
O
se
U
menu manager.
14. Click OK from the Water Line
al
dialog box.
15. At the top of the model tree, click
rn
Settings and select Tree

te
Filters .
• In the Model Tree Items dialog
In
box, select the Suppressed

objects check box and click
C
OK.
16. In the model tree, right-click CUT
PT
and select Resume.

r

Fo
waterline.

Performing a Waterlines Check
The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are not
too close to the external surfaces of the mold model.
• To perform a waterlines check, you
must specify:
– Part
– Waterline
– Minimum Clearance
• Color-coded results:
y
– Magenta — Areas within
minimum clearance.
nl
Figure 1 – Waterlines Check
– Green — Areas outside
Results
O
minimum clearance.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Waterlines within

C
Minimum Clearance
PT
Performing a Waterlines Check

You can perform a clearance check for waterline circuits by selecting the
Waterlines option from the analysis Type drop-down list in the Mold Analysis
r
Fo
dialog box. The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are
not too close to the external surfaces of the mold model. To perform the
waterlines check, you must specify the following:
• Part — Enables you to specify the part whose external surfaces are used
for measuring the minimum clearance. You cannot specify the reference
model as the part.
• Waterline — Enables you to specify which waterlines to analyze. Options
include:
– All Waterlines — All waterlines in the mold model are analyzed.
– Select Waterlines — Enables you to specify which waterlines are
analyzed.
– Select Surfaces — Enables you to specify a surface of the mold
component to be analyzed against the waterlines and the other external
surfaces of the mold component.

• Minimum Clearance — Enables you to specify the minimum clearance the
waterlines must be from the external surfaces of the specifie part.
Understanding Waterlines Check Results

The results of the waterlines check are color-coded into two categories:
• Magenta — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in magenta are less than
the minimum clearance specifie .
• Green — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in green are greater than
or equal to the minimum clearance specifie .
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Performing a Waterlines Check
Mold\Waterlines_Check WATERLINES-CHECK.ASM
Task 1: Perform a waterlines check on waterline circuits in a mold model.

2. Press CTRL and select WLINE-
CHECK_CAVITY.PRT and
WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
Compenent Display Style >
Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab. se
U
6. Notice the waterlines circuits
in the cavity and slider mold
al
components.
rn

te
Mold Analysis .
In
8. In the Mold Analysis dialog box,

select Waterlines from the Type
drop-down list if necessary.
C
• Click Select Part and

PT
select WLINE-CHECK_
CAVITY.PRT.
• Type 8 as the Minimum
r
Clearance and press ENTER.

Fo
• Click Compute.
Graphics toolbar.
10. Notice that only the outer ends
of the waterline circuit fall inside
of the minimum clearance
specifie .

edit the Minimum Clearance to
10 and click Compute.
12. Notice that only the counterbore
falls within the minimum
clearance specifie .
y
click Select Part and select
nl
WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
O
• Edit the Minimum Clearance
to 6 and click Compute.
14. Click Repaint .
15. Notice that it appears the se
U
waterline circuit is properly
designed.
al
rn
te
16. Zoom in on the waterlines circuit

and spin the model.
In
17. Notice that the waterlines circuit

is too close to the inner surface
C
of the mold component.

PT
18. Click Close from the Mold

Analysis dialog box.
r
Fo

19. Orient to the WLINES view
orientation.
WATERLINE_SLIDER and
select Edit .
21. Edit the waterline circuit diameter
to 6 and click Regenerate
from the Quick Access toolbar.
y
nl
O
Mold Analysis .
se
U
• Click Select Part and
select WLINE-CHECK_
al
SLIDER.PRT.
• Edit the Minimum Clearance
rn
to 6 and click Compute.

te
23. Click Repaint .

24. Zoom in on the waterline and
In
spin the model.

25. Notice that the waterline circuit
C
now properly falls outside of the

PT
minimum clearance specifie .

Analysis dialog box.
r
Fo

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings
You can modify the settings of a mold analysis to achieve
different results.
• Computation Settings
– Modify sample type.
– Modify plot resolution.
• Saving Analyses
– Quickly rerun a mold Figure 1 – Viewing Computation
analysis at different times. Settings
– Show/Blank selected
y
analyses.
nl
O
se
Figure 2 – Viewing Saved Analyses
U
Understanding Mold Analysis Settings
al
When performing a mold analysis, you can modify settings to achieve

different results. You can modify both computation and display settings. You
rn
can also save an analysis so that it can be easily rerun at a later time.
te
Modifying Computation Settings

When performing a mold analysis, the following computation settings are
In
available:
• Sample – Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated.
C
Options include Quality, Number, and Step.

PT
– Quality – Sets the plot sample type to Quality.

– Number of Points – Sets the plot sample type to Number of Points.
r
– Step – Sets the plot sample type to Step.

Fo
• Resolution – Adjusts the quality of the plot. For a Quality plot, you can
adjust the resolution from Low to High using a slider. For a Number of
Points plot, you can adjust the resolution by specifying the number of
points, and for a Step plot you can adjust the resolution either by specifying
a value or by using the slider from Min to Max.
You can also specify whether to add further accuracy to the mold analysis
computation by selecting the Result refinemen check box. This check box
causes additional computation to get more accurate results.
Saving Analyses
You can also save mold analyses within the model you are performing the
analysis on. Saving an analysis is beneficia because it enables you to
quickly repeat the same analysis at different times without having to specify
each of the references and options.

When saving an analysis, you must provide a name that contains no spaces.
You can save multiple analyses within the same model. All saved mold
analyses appear in the Saved Analyses area of the Mold Analysis dialog
box, as shown in Figure 2. You can show or blank analyses by selecting the
desired analysis and then clicking Show-Blank Analysis . In Figure 2,
both the SLIDER and CAVITY analyses are shown, or visible.
You can delete a saved analysis at any point by selecting it and clicking
Delete.
You can display multiple saved analyses at the same time in the
graphics window.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Sprues and Runners
You can create sprues, runners, and gates to channel molten
plastic into the mold cavity.
• Create sprues using sketch-based
features.
• Create runners and sometimes
gates using the Runner feature.
• Section shapes include:
– Round
– Half Round
y
– Hexagon
nl
– Trapezoid
O
– Round Trapezoid Figure 1 – Cavity Showing Sprues,
Runners, and Gates
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Core Showing

In
Runners and Gates
Creating Sprues
C
A sprue is the channel through which molten plastic is injected into the
PT
mold. The sprue should be as short as possible to minimize material usage.

Typically, the sprue is tapered to ensure proper ejection from the mold cavity.
You can create sprues in the mold model using sketch-based features such
r
as extrudes, revolve, sweeps, and blends.

Fo
Creating Runners and Gates

You can create runners and gates in the mold model to transfer material
from the sprue to the mold cavity. The runner is the channel that guides
the molten plastic from the sprue into the mold cavity, and the gate is the
restricted entrance from the runner into the mold cavity that helps to simplify
the removal of the fina molded parts from the runners.
You can use the Runner feature to create the runners in your mold model.
Depending upon the shape of your gates, you can also use the runner feature
to create them, or you can create them using sketch-based features such as
extrudes, revolves, sweeps, and blends.
You can create runners by sweeping a sketched section along a path or
trajectory. The following section shapes are available, and the dimensions
that defin the shapes are shown:

• Round — Assigns a circle to the runner's
cross-section.
• Half Round — Assigns a half circle to the

runner's cross-section.
• Hexagon — Assigns a six-sided polygon to the

• Trapezoid — Assigns a quadrilateral to the

y
nl
• Round Trapezoid — Assigns a trapezoid with
an arc base to the runner's cross-section.
O
se
In addition to the shape, you must defin the following items:
U
• Name — Enables you to specify the name of the Runner feature in the
model tree to be different than the default name applied by the system.
al
• Def Size — Enables you to specify the default size values for each of the
runner cross-section dimensions. The dimensions that you are prompted
rn
to specify depend on the section shape specifie .

• Flow Path — Enables you to either select or sketch the flo path for the
te
runner. If you select the flo path, you can select datum curves as the flo
path. If you sketch the flo path, you must specify the sketch plane and
In
reference plane and orientation. As you sketch the flo path in Sketcher,
a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line. This dashed line
denotes the actual section diameter of the runner.
C
• Direction — Specifie the direction of runner creation.

PT
• Intsct Parts — Enables you to select the mold components which the
runner intersects or cuts through. The same options available in the
Intersected Components dialog box for waterlines and ejector pin holes are
r
also available for runners.

Fo
Optionally, the Segment Sizes option enables you to defin runners with
segments of varying size within the same runner feature. When you specify
a runner segment that you want to be of different size than the default
size, the system prompts you to specify new dimensions to defin the
cross-section. Note that the runner shape specifie cannot be changed for
individual segments.
You can create sprues and runners any time after the workpiece and
reference model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously
created sprues, runners, and gates are automatically subtracted from the
mold volumes along with the reference model.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sprues and Runners
Mold\Sprue_Runner SPRUE-RUNNER.ASM
Task 1: Create the main runner.

Display types: .
2. Select PUCK_CAVITY.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
se
Transparent.
U
6. Notice the 4 cavity mold model.
7. Select the SPRUE feature
al
already created in the mold

model.
rn
8. Click Runner from the

te

In
9. Click Hexagon from the menu

manager.
10. Type 10 as the runner width and
C
press ENTER.
PT

MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
the sketching plane and click
r
Okay > Default from the menu

Fo
manager.
12. Click Centerline from the
Centerline types drop-down
menu and sketch a centerline on
the horizontal reference.
13. Sketch and dimension the line,
as shown.
14. Click OK .

15. Press CTRL, select the
PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and
PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected
16. In the Runner dialog box,
double-click Name, edit the
Name to MAIN_RUNNER, and
press ENTER.
• Click OK.
y
Task 2: Create the secondary runners and gates.
nl
O
1. Click Runner and click Round from the menu manager.
2. Type 4 as the runner diameter and press ENTER.
se
3. Click Use Prev > Okay from the menu manager.
U
4. Click References and
query-select datum plane
al
FRONT of the upper-right

reference model as well as its
rn
left edge.
• Click Close.
te
5. Click Centerline and

In
sketch a centerline on both the

vertical and original horizontal
C
references.
6. Sketch and dimension the line,
PT
as shown.
r
Fo
7. Sketch and dimension the two

smaller lines, as shown.

8. Drag a window around the three
lines.
9. Click Mirror from the Editing
group and select the horizontal
centerline.
10. Click OK .
11. Press CTRL, select the
y
PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and
nl
PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected
O
12. Click Repaint .
13. In the Runner dialog
box, double-click Name, se
U
edit the Name to
SECONDARY_RUNNER,
al
and press ENTER.

• Click Preview.
rn
14. In the Runner dialog box,

te
double-click Segment Sizes.

• Press CTRL, select the four
In
smaller segments, and click

Done/Return from the menu
C
manager.
• Type 2 as the runner segment
PT

• Click Done.
r
Fo
15. Click OK from the Runner dialog

box.

PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and select
Open .
17. Spin the model and observe the
sprues, runners, and gates.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes
Ejector pin clearance holes are created in mold components so
that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out.
• Ejector pin holes are similar to
conventional holes.
– You can specify a different
diameter through each
intersected component.
• Available types:
– Linear
y
– Radial
nl
– Coaxial Figure 1 – Completed Ejector
Pin Holes
O
– On Point
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Viewing Ejector Pin

rn
Holes in Core
te
Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes

The ejector pin clearance hole is a hole feature that is only available in Mold
In
mode. Ejector pin clearance holes are created in the mold components so
that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out. An ejector
C
pin clearance hole is very similar to the conventional hole feature except that
you can specify a different diameter through each component that the hole
PT
intersects in the mold model. An ejector pin hole is created as an assembly

feature in the mold model.
You can create the following types of ejector pin clearance holes:
r
Fo
• Linear – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,

offset linearly from two references.
• Radial – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
at a radial offset from an axis, and at an angle from a plane. When you
specify a radial hole type and select the axis, you can specify the radial
offset in the following ways:
– Diameter – Places the hole with a diameter dimension for the offset.
– Radius – Places the hole with a radius dimension for the offset.
– Linear – Places the hole with a linear dimension for the offset.
• Coaxial – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
through a selected datum axis. If ejector pins are already assembled in the
mold model, then you can use the coaxial hole to easily place the ejector
pin clearance holes. You can also use the axes created for the ejector pin
pads created in the reference model.

• On Point – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole through a specifie
datum point. If there are several datum points in the mold model where
the holes should be placed, you can simultaneously place holes at each
point within the same hole feature.
Once the ejector pin hole type and placement references have been defined
you must specify the following options:
• Direction – Determines the direction of hole creation. You can fli the
direction.
• Intersected Parts – Enables you to select the mold components that the
ejector clearance hole intersects. The following options are available for
determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the
ejector pin:
y
– Auto Update Intrscts – When this check box is selected, the system
nl
automatically determines which mold components are cut by the ejector
pin hole feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When
O
this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference
models and any molding.
se
– Select a component to intersect – Enables you to manually specify
which components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature.
U
– AutoAdd – Similar to the Auto Update Intrscts check box, when this
option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold
al
components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature.

– Info – Enables you to display information regarding the ejector pin hole
rn
feature in the browser.

The mold components that are specifie display in the Intersected
te
Components dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can

select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select
In
Remove.
• Counterbore – Each ejector pin clearance hole contains a counterbore.
C
You must also specify the counterbore diameter and depth.

r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes
Mold\Ejector-Pin EJECTOR-PIN.ASM
Task 1: Create a coaxial ejector pin clearance hole.

Display types:
2. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT.
y
tab.
nl
O
se
Transparent.
U
6. Notice the four ejector pin pads
on the reference model.
al
7. Click the Production Features

group drop-down menu and
rn
select Ejector Pin Hole .

te

Coaxial > Done.
In
9. Select datum axis A_6.

C
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click

PT
Okay from the menu manager.

11. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT
and specify a hole diameter of
r
0.6.
Fo

13. Type 1.2 as the counterbore
14. Type 1 as the counterbore depth
and press ENTER.
15. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole
dialog box.

Task 2: Create an On Point ejector pin clearance hole.

2. In the menu manager, click On
Point > Done.
3. Select datum point EJ-PIN and
click Done.
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click
y
nl
Okay.
O
0.6.
se
U
diameter.
al
8. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.

rn

dialog box.
te
Task 3: Create a Linear ejector pin clearance hole.

In

C

PT

Linear > Done.
r
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT as the
Fo
placement plane.
4. Select the front left
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface
and type 5.5 as the offset
distance.

5. Select the front right
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface
and type 8 as the offset distance.
manager.
0.6.
y
nl
diameter.
O
se
dialog box.
U
al
Task 4: Create a Radial ejector pin clearance hole.

rn

te

In

Radial > Done.
C

EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the
PT
upper-right quadrant as the

placement point.
4. Select datum axis A_1 as the
r
radial dimension origin.

Fo

MOLD_RIGHT to the right
of datum axis A_1 as the radial
dimension origin.
6. Type 225 as the Angle and press
ENTER.
7. Click Radius > Done from the menu manager.
8. Type 3.75 as the radius value.
9. Click Okay from the menu manager.
10. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the bottom-left quadrant and specify
a hole diameter of 0.6.

diameter.
dialog box.
15. Disable Plane Display , Axis
Display , and Point Display
y
.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a
library of commonly used geometry.
• Defin a UDF from a “template”
model.
– Standalone
♦ Reference Part option
– Subordinate
• Select features to include.
– Must be sequential
y
• Defin prompts.
nl
– Every reference requires a
O
prompt.
• Defin any variable items
Figure 1 – “Template” Model
se
(optional).
– Variable elements or
dimensions
U
– Family Table
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface

PT
While Definin Prompts
Creating UDFs
r
Fo
User-define features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and

dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by
helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.
Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model
To create a UDF, you must firs create a "template" part containing the same
base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the
features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is
shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the
number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number
of references makes the most efficien UDFs.
Defin the UDF (*.gph file in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name.
The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company,
and is define by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from
the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.

Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
• Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and
automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the
UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the
subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the
original model, they are automatically reflecte in the UDF.
• Standalone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the
original model information into the UDF fil . If you make any changes to
the original model, they are not reflecte in the UDF. When you create a
standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part.
If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a
“_GP” suffix.
y
nl
Selecting Features to Include
Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features
O
must be sequential in the model tree.
se
Defining Prompts
You must defin a prompt for each reference created within the selected
U
features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require
prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference
al
when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the

target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should
rn
be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you

defin its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create
te
more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple
prompts for that reference.
In
• Single – Specifie a single prompt for the reference used in several

features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the
C
reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group
that use the same reference.
PT
• Multiple – Specifie an individual prompt for each feature that uses this
reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is
highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.
r
Fo
Defining Variable Items

You can also defin any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an
optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a
dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's
dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefin the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of
the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features,
dimensions, and parameters.
Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph fil is saved to the current directory. You
can edit a define UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs
Feature_Tools\Create_udf CREATE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

Display types: .
2. Right-click Extrude 2 in
y
the model tree and select
nl
Information > Reference
Viewer.
O
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog
box, notice that Extrude 2
references datum plane RIGHT
and Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to se
U
Extrude 1 and cursor over each
of the surface references.
al
5. Notice that the top, fla surface

rn
and the circular surface are the

two references on the model.
te
6. Click Close from the Reference

Viewer.
In
7. In the ribbon, select the Tools

tab.
C
8. Click UDF Library from the

PT
Utilities group.
9. Click Create from the menu
manager.
r
10. Type keyway as the name and

Fo
press ENTER.
Subordinate > Done > Add >
Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature
to add and click Done/Return.

13. Notice the top surface highlighted
in red. This is the firs required
reference.
14. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press
ENTER.
y
16. Notice datum plane highlighted in
nl
red. This is the second required
reference.
O
18. Type orientation reference
plane and press ENTER.
se
U
al
rn
19. Notice the cylindrical surface

highlighted in red. This is the
te
third required reference.

In

21. Type cylinder surface and
C
press ENTER.
PT

menu manager.
r
Fo
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length)
2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.
26. Notice that the firs dimension is
highlighted.
the prompt for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press
ENTER.

29. Notice that the second dimension
is highlighted.
the prompt for the dimension.
31. Type key length and press
ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to
complete UDF creation.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your
company's UDF library into your model.
• Open existing UDF (*.gph)

• Select Placement references
– Prompts can aid you
• Edit Variable Dimensions and
Annotations Elements
• Options
y
– Scaling
nl
– Dimension display
– Redefin features on-the-fl
O
• Adjustments Figure 1 – Viewing References
se
– Flip orientation U on the Original UDF
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Selecting References

for UDF Placement Figure 3 – The Placed UDF
PT
Placing UDFs
If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design
r
Fo
models, it can be more efficien to have the system create that geometry for
you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be
much faster than creating it new each time.
Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)

When placing a UDF, firs you must open the target model. You can insert a
UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group in the
ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph fil . The original template
model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides
the User Define Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place
UDFs in multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model.
The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created
from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts
Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that
was define during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references,
you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the
correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement
dynamically updates in the graphics window.
Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements

You can edit any of the items define as Variable Items during UDF creation.
These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.
Specifying Options
y
nl
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement.
You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a
O
scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size
of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units.
Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of
se
the elements that are not specifie as variables in the UDF.
You also have the ability to redefin any features contained in the UDF
U
on-the-fl . This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After
selecting features to redefine you must step the regeneration of the UDF
al
back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them.
After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears,
rn
enabling you to redefin it.

te
Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement

In
Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in

one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the
Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and fli its
C
orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is

PT
successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the
UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model.
You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.
r
Fo
Updating a Modified UDF

If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it
results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group
without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified the copied
group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original
UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the
group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking
UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu
and then regenerating the model.

PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs
Feature_Tools\Place_UDF PLACE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group.
• Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open.
y
• Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration
nl
and click OK.
O
3. Notice that a reference model
has been created for this UDF,
se
and displays in a subwindow.
• Notice that the firs required
reference is highlighted in the
U
subwindow, and placement
preview of the feature is shown
al
in the main graphics window.

rn
• Notice that Reference 1 is

highlighted in the User Define
Feature Placement dialog box
te
and the description prompt

reads sketching plane.
In
• Select a corresponding planar

surface, as shown.
C
4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog

PT
box.
• Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
r
• Notice that the description

Fo
prompt reads orientation

reference plane.
• Select a corresponding plane,
as shown.

5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog
box.
• Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
• Also notice that the description
prompt reads cylinder
surface.
• Select a corresponding
surface, as shown.
y
nl
6. In the User Define Feature
O
Placement dialog box, select the
Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5
dimension from 2.00 to 4. se
U
al
rn

te
Placement dialog box, select the

Adjustments tab.
In

Placement dialog box, click Flip
C
and then click Accept .

PT
For a more complex UDF,

there may be multiple
reference directions that can
r
be flippe . The system lists

Fo
each reference direction

in the dialog box, enabling
you to fli /preview each
reference.

Module 14
y
Filling and Opening the Mold
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn how to create the mold result (also known as the
molding) after extracting mold components. You create the molding by
simulating the fillin of the mold cavity with molten material through mold
U
features such as sprues, runners, and gates.
al
You can then simulate the mold opening process in order to check the
correctness of your design. Draft and interference checks can be performed
rn
to verify proper mold opening.

te
Objectives
In
• Create a molding.
• Simulate the mold opening sequence.
C
• Check draft on mold components during the opening of the mold.

PT
• Check interference on mold components during the opening of the mold.

• View mold information.
r
Fo

Creating a Molding
You can create the molding by filling the mold cavity through
the sprue, runners, and gates.
• Molding parts:
– Contain a Molding feature.
– Are fully-functional parts.
– Maintain a parent/child
relationship with mold model
components and features.
• There can be only one molding
y
part in the model. Figure 1 – Molding Part
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Another Molding Part Figure 3 – Mold Model

rn
Creating a Molding
te
When a mold is filled molten plastic is injected into the sprue, and it then
travels through the runners and gates to fil the mold cavity. The solidifie
In
result is known as the molding. There can be only one molding part in the
model at a time.
C
Creo Parametric enables you to simulate the fillin of the mold cavity and
PT
generate the molding. In addition to the mold cavity, the sprues, runners, and
gates are also fille to generate the fina molding. The molding part is created
by using the following molding formula:
• Molding = sum of all current workpiece geometry - assembly level cuts
r
Fo
that intersect the workpiece (waterlines, for example) - all extracted parts
(sliders and cores, for example) - ejector pin clearance holes
The molding part is created in the mold model, and it contains a single
Molding feature that contains the solid geometry. The molding feature
cannot be redefined but the part is a fully functional part. You can retrieve
it in Part mode and perform various operations on the molding part such as
removing excess material using Pro/NC, calculating mass properties, and
also generating a mesh for flo analysis. To save the molding part, you must
save the mold model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current
Creo Parametric session.
The molding part maintains a parent/child relationship with the mold
components and assembly level features. Therefore, the molding
automatically updates when changes are made to the mold components or
assembly level features. For example, if the sprue diameter is increased, the
molding part automatically updates to reflec the larger diameter.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Molding
Mold\Molding MOLDING.ASM
Task 1: Create a molding in a mold model.

MLD_HUB_MOLD_CAVITY.
PRT.
y
nl
tab.
O
Transparent.
5. Notice the sprue and runner. se
U
6. In the ribbon, select the Mold
tab.
al
7. Click Create Molding from

rn
the Components group.

8. Type HUB_MOLDING as the
te
Part name and press ENTER.

In

default Mold Part Common
Name [hub_molding.prt].
C
10. Notice the new component

PT
created in the model tree called

HUB_MOLDING.PRT.
11. Right-click HUB_MOLDING.PRT
r
Fo
and select Open .

molding part.
13. Notice the single Molding feature
in the model tree.

Opening the Mold
You can simulate the mold opening process by defining steps
and moves in the mold model.
• Defin steps.
• Defin moves within steps.
• Rules:
– Each step can contain
several moves.
– Components can be in
only one move per step.
y
– A move may contain
nl
several members.
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Fully Opened Mold
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Closed Mold Figure 3 – Partially Open Mold

PT
Opening the Mold

You can simulate the mold opening process to determine whether your fina
design matches your original design intent. The mold opening process is a
r
Fo
series of steps, containing one or more moves. You can specify moves for
any component, or member, of the mold model except the reference model
and the workpiece. It is convenient to blank the reference model, workpiece,
and all mold volumes, as well as the parting lines and surfaces before
opening the mold.
In order to simulate the mold opening process, you must defin the following:
• Defin Move — An instruction to move one or more members of the mold
model. When definin a move, you must specify the following items:
– The members to be moved.
– The direction reference of the movement. You can select a linear edge,
axis, or plane to indicate the direction. When the direction reference is
specified an arrow indicates the positive direction.
– The offset value. The members move the amount specifie in the
direction of the reference specifie . The members move parallel to the

edge or axis, or normal to the plane. You can specify a positive offset
value or a negative offset value to move the member in the opposite
direction.
• Defin Step — A collection of define moves for opening the mold.
You can also perform the following operations on the mold opening simulation:
• Delete — Enables you to delete an existing step.
• Delete All — Enables you to delete all existing steps.
• Modify — Enables you to modify an existing step by adding or deleting
moves from the step.
• Modify Dim — Enables you to modify the offset value of a given move. You
must regenerate the mold model in order for the new value to take effect.
y
• Reorder — Enables you to switch the order of existing steps. You can
nl
specify the step you want reordered, then select the step that you want it
to become.
O
• Explode — Enables you to simulate the mold opening by stepping through
the sequence, in order, one step at a time. Members included in the moves
se
of the step are translated according to the specifie offsets. You can
continue to step through all the steps in the sequence. A message in the
U
message window indicates when all components in the mold model have
been successfully exploded. You can also animate the entire opening
sequence.
al
rn
Rules for Defining a Move

You must remember the following rules when definin moves:
te
• Each step may contain several moves that are performed simultaneously.
In
• A member can be included in only one move per step.

• A move may contain several members, but they are all offset in the same
C
direction and by the same value.

r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Opening the Mold
Mold\Opening OPEN-MOLD.ASM
Task 1: Create a mold opening sequence of steps.

2. Click Mold Opening from the
Analysis group.
y
nl
4. Select OPEN-MOLD_SLIDER1.
O
PRT and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
5. Select the top, front edge to

defin the direction. se
U
6. Type -150 and press ENTER.
al
7. Click Define Move from the

menu manager.
rn
8. Query-select OPEN-MOLD_
SLIDER2.PRT and click OK from
te
the Select dialog box.

In
9. Select the top, front edge to

C
defin the direction.

PT
10. Type 150 and press ENTER.

r
Fo

manager.

Move.
13. Select OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.
PRT and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
14. Select the right, vertical edge to

manager.
y
nl
O
se
U
al

rn
Move.
18. Select OPEN-MOLD_MOLDING.
te
PRT and click OK from the Select

In
dialog box.
19. Select the right, vertical edge to
C
r PT
Fo

manager.
y
nl
O
Task 2: Simulate the mold opening.
1. Click Explode > Open Next from

the menu manager.
2. Click Open Next two more times se
U
to step through the mold opening
sequence.
al
3. The OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.PRT
rn
needs to open before the sliders.

te
4. Click Reorder > Step 1 from the

menu manager.
In
5. Click Step 2 as the new step for

Step 1 to become.
C
6. Click Explode > Open Next.

PT
7. Notice that the cavity now opens

firs .
8. Click Open Next two more times
to step through the mold opening
r
Fo
process.
9. Click Explode > Animate All from the menu manager to animate
the full mold opening sequence.

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step
You can perform draft checking on mold components during
the mold opening sequence.
• Specify the step to check.
• Specify the following:
– Pull direction
– Draft Angle
– One Side/Both Sides
– Full Color/Three Color
y
– Part or surfaces to check
Figure 1 – Opened Mold
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Draft Check on a Slider Figure 3 – Draft Check on the Molding

rn
Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step

You can perform draft checking on mold components during the mold opening
te
sequence. You can use draft checking to determine whether the mold
components have the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles in
In
order to facilitate the mold opening process.

In order to perform a draft check, you must firs specify on which step of
C
the opening sequence you want to perform the draft check. You must also
specify the following items to perform a draft check during the mold opening
PT
sequence:
• Pull Dir – Specifie the pull direction to be used for the draft check. You
can specify the pull direction using either of the following methods:
r
Fo
– Specify – Enables you to select a pull direction. You can filte the pull
direction reference by plane, coordinate system, curve, edge, or axis
and specify the proper reference. You can also fli the pull direction to
the opposite side of the reference.
– Move Num – Enables you to specify a pull direction reference by
specifying a move number in the step.
• Draft Angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check.
• One Side/Both Sides – Enables you to specify whether the draft check is
performed on one or both sides of the direction reference.
• Full Color/Three Color – Enables you to specify whether the display is
shown using the full color spectrum or with three colors.
• Part or surface to check for drafting – Once you have specifie the pull
direction and draft angle, you must specify a part to check for drafting or a
surface to check for drafting.

PROCEDURE - Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step
Mold\Opening_Draft-Check DRAFT-CHECK.ASM
Task 1: Perform draft checks on mold opening sequence steps.

Analysis group.
y
the menu manager.
nl
4. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_
O
CAVITY.PRT opens in the firs
step, and that it opens upward.
se
5. Click Open Next from the menu
manager.
U
6. Notice that the sliders open next
in the second step, horizontal to
al
the mold model pull direction.

7. Click Open Next.
rn
8. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_

te
MOLDING.PRT is ejected in
the third step, and that it opens
In
upward.
C
r PT
9. Click Modify > Step 2 > Draft

Fo
Check > Both Sides > Three

Color > Done from the menu
manager.
10. Click Move Num > Move 1 from
the menu manager.
11. Type 2 as the draft check angle
and press ENTER.
12. Select DRAFT-CHECK_
SLIDER1.PRT and notice the
draft.

13. Click Continue > Setup Dft Ck
14. Select the Pull Dir check box
and click Both Sides > Three
Color > Done > Move Num >
Move 2 from the menu manager.
SLIDER2.PRT and notice the
draft.
16. Click Done/Return >
Done/Return > Done from
y
the menu manager.
nl
17. Click Modify > Step 3 > Draft
O
Check > One Side > Full Color
> Done.
18. Click Move Num > Move 1.
19. Type 2 as the draft check angle
and press ENTER. se
U
al
MOLDING.PRT and notice the

draft.
rn
21. Click Continue and select

DRAFT-CHECK_CORE.PRT
te
and notice the draft.

In
22. Click Done/Return >

Done/Return > Done >
Done/Return.
C
PT

r
Fo

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step
Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for
interference with the static parts for each move you define.
• Defin the move to perform the

interference check on.
• Specify the static part to check
for interference with.
• Interferences highlighted:
– Curves
y
– Points
nl
O
Figure 1 – Interference Curves
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Interference Point

In
Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step

Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for interference with a
C
static part for each move you defin . After you have define a move, you
PT
must select a static part to check for interference with the current part that
you have define for the move. Areas that are interfering either have their
curves highlighted, as shown in Figure 1 or, if interference curves cannot be
found, the resulting interference is highlighted by a red point, as shown in
r
Fo
Figure 2. You can delete the move and try another method of opening the
mold to prevent the interference of parts. You may have to redefin your
mold components.

PROCEDURE - Interference Checking a Mold Opening
Step
Mold\Opening_Interference INTERFERENCE.ASM
Task 1: Perform interference checking on mold opening sequence steps.

y
Analysis group.
nl
the menu manager.
O
4. Notice the INTERFERENCE_
CAVITY.PRT opens in the firs
step, and that it opens upward.
se
U
al
rn
5. Click Open Next from the menu

manager.
te
6. Notice that the sliders open next

in the second step, horizontal to
In
the mold model pull direction.

7. Click Open Next.
C
8. Notice the INTERFERENCE_

MOLDING.PRT is ejected in
PT
the third step, and that it opens

upward.
r
Fo
9. Click Modify > Step 1 >

Interference > Move 1 from the
menu manager.
10. Query-select INTERFERENCE_
MOLDING.PRT as the static
part.
11. Notice that the status bar
states that no interference was
detected between the cavity and
the molding.

12. Click Static Part from the
menu manager and select
INTERFERENCE_SLIDER1.
PRT.
13. Notice that there is no
interference between the
slider and the cavity.
14. Click Done/Return > Done from
the menu manager.
y
menu manager.
nl
16. Select INTERFERENCE_
O
part.
se
17. Notice the highlighted
interference curves between
the molding and the slider.
U
18. Click Done/Return.
al
19. Click Interference > Move 2

rn
20. Select INTERFERENCE_

te

part.
In

interference curves between
the molding and the second
C
slider.
PT
22. Click Done/Return > Done.

r
Fo
menu manager.
24. Select INTERFERENCE_CORE.
PRT as the static part.
interference point
between the molding and
INTERFERENCE_CORE.PRT.
26. Click Done/Return > Done >
Done/Return.

Viewing Mold Information
You can view information about your mold model any time you
are in Mold mode.
• View the following information:
– BOM
– Components
– Cavity Layouts
– Split Volumes
– Created Volumes
y
– Parting Surf
nl
– Split
– Last Volume
O
– Shrinkage
Figure 1 – Viewing Created
se
U Volumes Information
al
rn
te
In
C
Figure 2 – Viewing Split Volumes

Information
PT
Viewing Mold Information

You can view information about your mold model any time you are in Mold
r
Fo
mode by clicking the Analysis group drop-down menu and selecting Mold
. You can view the following types of information about the mold:
• BOM – Displays a bill of materials of all components found in the mold
model.
• Components – Displays information on all the components in the mold
model, including reference models, workpiece, extracted components,
and the molding.
• Cavity layouts – Displays information on all cavity layouts. You can view
the coordinate system references used for placement of the cavity, the
layout type, the number of cavities in respective directions, the names and
locations of each cavity, and the overall workpiece size.
• Split volumes – Displays all volumes created in the mold model as a result
of split operations. You can view the mold volume name, its display status
in the mold model, and its feature ID.

• Created volumes – Displays information on all sketched mold volumes in
the mold model. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in
the mold model, and its feature ID.
• Parting surface – Displays information on all parting surfaces created in the
mold model. You can view the parting surface name, its display status in
• Split – Displays all the split operations performed in the mold model. You
can view the parent and child feature ID's of the split, the parting surface
used, and the resulting volumes created.
• Last volume – Displays the last created volume in the mold model. You
can view the mold volume name, how it was created, its display status in
y
• Shrinkage – Displays any shrinkage applied to the reference model. If the
nl
mold model contains more than one reference model, you must specify
for which reference model you want shrinkage information. You can view
O
the coordinate system specifie for the shrinkage, the shrinkage formula
used, and the shrink factors used.
se
You can specify whether you want the output displayed in an Information
window within Creo Parametric, whether you want it written to a file or both.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Viewing Mold Information
Mold\Information MOLD-INFO.ASM
Task 1: Investigate the information for a mold model.

.
y
Mold
3. In the Mold Information dialog
nl
box, clear all Type check boxes
except for Shrinkage.
O
• Clear the To file check box,
leaving the To screen check
box selected.
• Click Apply. se
U
4. Click Close from the information
window.
al

rn
box, clear the Shrinkage check

box.
te
• Select the Cavity layouts

check box.
In
• Click Apply.
C
window.
PT

r
box, clear the Cavity layouts

Fo
check box.
• Select the Created volumes
check box.
• Click Apply.
window.

box, clear the Created volumes
check box.
• Select the Parting surface
check box.
• Click Apply.
window.
box, clear the Parting surface
check box.
y
nl
• Select the Split volumes
check box.
O
• Click Apply.
se
window. U
al
rn

box, clear the Split volumes
te
check box.
• Select the BOM check box.
In
• Click Apply.
C
window.
PT

Information dialog box.
r
Fo

TRN 4517 400 03 - SG Ins - Lec - EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRN 4517 400 03 - SG Ins - Lec - EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRN 4517 400 03 - SG Ins - Lec - EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.

Authored and published using

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)

and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer

PTC Inc., 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

TRN-4517-M03-EN-LM-P01 07/23/2015 Initial Printing of:

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Welcome to PTC University!

need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries

• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people

organization’s overall performance goals.

offerings that PTC University has available. These include:

• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that will

compliment your instructor-led course.

• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact

Precision Learning in the Classroom

Precision Learning After the Class

As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

Recommended Learning Report based on your results.

instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The

Module 12 ― Mold Component Extraction

Module 14 ― Filling and Opening the Mold

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Mold Models ...............................................................................4-1

Creating New Mold Models .......................................................4-2

Locating the Reference Model ................................................. 4-12

Assembling the Reference Model ............................................. 4-17

Redefinin the Reference Model .............................................. 4-26

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout .................................................. 4-34

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation................................... 4-42

Calculating Projected Area ...................................................... 4-46

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions.................... 9-12

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions .................. 9-17

Parting Surface Creation ............................................................ 10-1

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools ........................ 10-2

Creating a Shadow Surface ................................................... 10-11

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces ........................................... 10-17

Extending Curves ................................................................ 10-26

Filling Loops....................................................................... 10-32

♦ Exercise (if applicable)

Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate

Procedure / Exercise Header

1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.

3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should

close any open file and erase them from memory:

• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.

– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.

– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3\.

– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric3 folder.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Step 1: Configur Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be

• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric3 folder.

• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.